TACTICAL WEAPONS INNOVATIONS
1914 .. 1911
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Landships! is a simulation depicting the tactical
prowess of the early tanks and other innovative weap-
ons. The game simulates the "Great War' at its more
interesting periods, primarily between the years 1916-
18. It is at this time when many weapon innovations
were introduced to Uy and break the deadlock. These
new weapons are now explored for the first time at the
tactical level: Flamethrowers, Anti-Tank guns and rifles,
and the most awesome of all, the Landshipl
1.11 Game Scale: Vehicles, Aircraft, Weapon Units,
Forward Observers and Tank Leader counters all rep-
resent individual units. Cavalry, infantry and MG
counters represent platoon sized units. Crew counters
represent the 3-5 men necessary to operate a single
Weapons Unit. Each hex is around I 00 meters and each
tum is about five minutes in length.
2.0 GAME COMPONENTS
Your copy of Landships! should contain the follow-
ing components:
Four double-sided map sections numbered I
through 8.
420 die cut playing pieces.
One Rulebook with Historical Commentary.
One Fast Start Rulebook and scenario printed in
the center of the Rulebook.
One booklet of Scenarios printed in the middle of
this Rulebook.
One 8 1/2" x II " cardstock sheet containing all the
charts and tables necessary to play the game.
One ten-sided and one six-sided dice
If any of these parts are missing or damaged, write
to:
Clash of Arms Games
The Byrne Building #205
Lincoln and Morgan Sts.
Phoenixville PA, 19460
Rulebook
Questions regarding the play of this game may be
sent to the above address as well. Please enclose a
stamped, self-addressed envelope (SASE) with your
queries to ensure a response.
2.1 The Map
The assorted back printed map sections represent
the various types of terrain usually encountered dur-
ing the Great War. Each scenario shows how to con-
nect any required map sections. A hex grid has been
superimposed on top of the map to regulate the posi-
tion of units for movement and combat purposes.
NOTE: Half hexes formed by the grid along the
map edges arefully playable and treated as complete
hexes in every way. In addition. "Clear" terrain hexes
include those with any number ofshe/lholes, or soli-
tary trees or buildings. In short, Clear terrain hexes
are a// those not specifically labeled some other ter-
rain type. Town hexes consist ofonly those hexes con-
taining buildings that have a proper name printed
near them, i.e. "Martel" on Map 3.
Printed on each map is the map number used for
referencing the scenario set ups and a Barrage Anack
Scaner Diagram showing where off target artillery
fire lands. It also serves as the Tum Track. Place the
Game Tum marker on the diagram and advance it
with each tum.
2.2 Soft Target Units
All the die-cut playing pieces (or "units") listed in
this section are primarily composed of men and/or
horses and thus are considered "Soft targets". Units
are printed with various drawings and numbers. In
general, a unit's values do not change during the game,
except temporarily. Units listed here can be affected
by any Small Arms Fire Attacks directed against them.
All units listed here capable of firing may do so in
any direction at any time. Facing rules do not apply
to them. Allied units have a blue background. Cen-
tral Power units have a grey background.
R- 1
2.21 Foot Troops (FTs): Foot Troops consist of infan-
try and MG platoon sized units. The drawings used on
the counters have no effect on play. All Foot Troop units
have four numbers printed on their counter. The num-
bers as explained as follows:
Front Back
Allied
lnfanUy
Platoon
Allied
MG
Platoon
Central Powers
lnfanUy
Platoon
Central Powers
MG
Platoon
a. The number printed in the upper left is the FTunit's
Fire Strength (FS) or basic attack value.
b. The number printed in the upper right is the FT
unit's Weapon Range (WR) in hexes, counted from the
firing unit (exclusive) to the target hex (inclusive). In-
fantry platoons all have a range of six hexes. MG pla-
toons all have a range of nine hexes.
c. The encircled number printed in the lower left is
theFT unit's Morale Rating (MR) and can be thought
of as its basic defense strength.
d. The number printed in the lower right is it's Move-
ment Allowance (MA), always a value of I. Note that
FT units can move twice per turn using this allowance,
once in each Foot Troop Movement Phase.
-------1Landships!-------
2.22 Crews: The generic Crew units pro- ~
"""' •~
have no FS""""
or WRuvalues. " •h<we
FT " 'They "'"
do pos- ~ FTunits.
sess a universal MR of four. They move • 1
like FT units, possessing a Movement Al-
lowance of I. Crews are "Soft Targets" and are affected
by normal Small Arms Fire Attacks directed them. A
Crew's main function in the game is to operate the vari-
ous Weapons Units but some are required to simulate
Vehicle Crews as well.
2.23lndividuals: Tank Leaders (TLs) and Forward Ob-
servers (FOs) are Individuals. They are treated like FT
units as well but have no FS or WR values either. FOs
and TLs (when outside their tank) move like FT units
and have a MA of I printed in their lower right hand
comer. Like FT units and Crews, Individuals are con-
sidered "Soft Targets" and are affected by Small Arms
Fire Attacks directed at them.
a. TLs have no MR, they are immune
to Morale Checks. Instead they possess
a Break Down, Repair and Anti-Tank Fire
Attack modifier of -I printed in their
lower left hand comer.
b. FOs assume the highest MR of any
platoon sized FT unit they are stacked
with in the hex (or use their printed value
of"5" if alone in the hex).
2.24 Cavalry Troops (CTs): Either player may pos-
sess cavalry and/or cavalry MG platoons in a scenario.
The CT unit counter simulates the unit when it is
mounted on horses (regardless of what the drawing
shows). A dismounted CT unit is shown by substitut-
ing the equivalent infantry or MG platoon FT unit. In
mounted mode, CTs have no FS or WR values printed
on them, only a MR and a dual Movement Allowance
printed on their counter. The numbers are described as
follows:
Front Back
Allied
Cavalry
Platoon [IJ [S] Q'
I~I [S]
Allied
MG Cavalry
Platoon
Q'
[iJ [S]
Central Powers
Cavalry
Platoon Q'
[i] [S]
Central Powers
MG Cavalry
Platoon
~ plicity. these become adjacent hexes.
Q'
a. The encircled number printed in the lower left is
the CT unit's Morale Rating (MR) and can be thought
of as its basic defense strength.
b. The two numbers separated by a slash printed in
the lower right is its Trotting/Charging Movement Al-
lowances (MA). CT units may choose to use either rate
each tum, but move in the Vehicle and Cavalry Move-
ment Phase and not during the Foot Troop Movement
Phases (unless Dismounted).
c. All CT units are considered Soft Target types and
are affected by Small Arms Fire Attacks directed against
them.
2.3 Weapon Units
Weapon Units (WUs) represent single, powerful guns
or man-portable Anti-Tank weapons. The guns gener-
ally require a Crew unit to operate them. The man-por-
table WUs can be carried by individual platoon sized
Front Back
[!J
May fire
upto3
times per
Phase vs.
vehicles
A. ,10 May fire
upto3
times per
Phase vs.
37mmAT vehicles
30 ~1 30~1
2 shots telt 1 lhot telt
May fire
~
upto3
times per
T Phase.
To hn: 1-2
Rifle
a. Printed at the bottom ofeach counter is the type of
WU the counter represents. Anti-Aircraft (AA), Anti-
Tank (AT) and Artillery (ART) guns all require a Crew.
Anti-Tank rifles and Flamethrowers are man-portable
and can be carried by individual platoon sized FT units.
b. Flamethrowers possess a FS value printed in the
upper left hand comer of the counter and thus may con-
duct Small Arms Fire Attacks as well as Anti-Tank Fire
Attacks. AT guns and AT rifles lack an FS value and
may only conduct Anti-Tank Fire Attacks. ART guns
may conduct Barrage Attacks and Anti-Tank Fire At-
tacks and Small Arms Fire Attacks. AA guns may fire
at Aircraft and also conduct Anti-Tank Fire Attacks, but
not Barrage or Small Arms Fire Attacks.
c. All WUs will either have one or two WRs printed
in the upper right hand comer of the counter. WRs are
expressed in terms of hexes and are measured by count-
ing a path of hexes from the firing hex (exclusive) to
the target hex (inclusive). If a WU only has one range
listed, then that is its maximum range against all target
types. Ifit has two ranges, then the first numberto the
left of the slash is its maximum range when engaging
in direct fire against a Spotted ground target, and the
second number to the right is its maximum range in
hexes when conducting an indirect fire Barrage Attack
at ground targets (or AA direct fire at Aircraft in the
case of AA guns).
NOTE: The WRs in some cases reflects the unit's
effective range to hit a target more than the unit's ac-
tual range capability. For example, the actual range
for the German Flamethrower was 40 yards, the Ger-
man Anti-Tank rifle had a range of 70 yards,for sim-
d. WUs do not have a Morale Rating per se, the MR
of the Crew manning them determines if the WU is
knocked out.
e. WUs do not possess a printed Movement Allow-
ance. Unless mounted on a Vehicle or capable of being
carried by FT units, WUs may not move once set up.
They may change their facing within a hex however.
f. Gun WUs subject to Facing requirements have a
small triangle printed at the upper left of the counter
pointed towards their"front" . Those which are not (i.e.
may fire in any direction at any time) have a black circle
printed in this comer showing they possess all around
fire capabilities.
NOTE: WUs mounted on Vehicles may have both a
triangle (symbolizing the facing ofthe Vehicle) and a
circle (symbolizing all round firing capability of the
WU) printed in the upper lejl hand corner.
R-2
2.4 Vehicles
Many Vehicle types are supplied in the game. Each
counter represents one Tank, Amnored Car, or Truck of
the indicated type. Allied vehicles have a beige back-
ground. Central Power units are printed on green.
A.l9.. ~ ~-4a
D
~E
315
A+1
I
2.41 Vehicle Types: Vehicles come in three varieties,
14
Tanks, Armored Cars, and Trucks.
a. Tanks are considered "Hard Targets" and are not
(usually) affected by Small Arms Fire Attacks directed
against them. An Anti-Tank Fire Attack is required.
Tanks are subject to Facing requirements and have a
small triangle printed in the upper left hand comer of
the counter indicating its "front". Tanks do block the
Line of Sight through the hex they occupy.
b. Armored Cars (ACs) are considered "Hard Tar-
gets" but have a small chance ofbeing affected by Small
Arms Fire Attacks directed againstthem.AnAnti-Tank
Fire Attack is usually more effective. ACs are subject
to Facing requirements and have a small triangle printed
in the upper left hand comer of the counter indicating
their"front". Unlike Tanks, ACs do not block the Line
of Sight through a hex.
c. Trucks are considered "Soft Targets" and are af-
fected by Small Arms Fire Attacks directed against them
as well as Anti-Tank Fire Attacks. Trucks are subject to
Facing requirements and have a small triangle printed
in the upper left hand comer of the counter indicating
their "front". Like ACs, Trucks also do not block the
Line of Sight through a hex.
2.42 Vehicle Weapons and Ranges: Each Vehicle's ar-
mament and field of fire is printed in the center of the
Scenario book. It is important to understand that aVe-
hicle may be facing in one direction but be capable of
firing in other directions due to the layout of the weap-
ons on the Vehicle. Refer to the individual Vehicle field
of fire diagrams in the Scenario book.
a. Each Vehicle's main gun, regardless of type, has a
universal FS of 10 if it is 75Jllm or greater in size, or 8
if it is less than 75mm, for Small Arms Fire Attack pur-
poses against Soft Targets. All such Vehicle main guns
are equally effective in an Anti-Tank role verses other
Vehicles (for simplicity, not to mention the thin armor
on the early Tanks). Each machine gun on a Vehicle
has an universal FS of 2 points for Small Arms Fire
Attack purposes as well, regardless of type.
b. Each Vehicle (if armed) has a WR of 9 printed in
the upper right comer of the counter. This number is
both the WR of the Vehicle's main gun(s) and the range
of its machine guns.
NOTE: No Vehicle has a WR over 9 hexes (history
notes ftNJ battles that took place beyond this range).
c. Armored Cars typically possess only machine guns.
Each machine gun on an AC has a universal FS of 2
points and a printed WR of9.
d. Many Trucks are unarmed. Trucks which do have
mounted main guns or machine guns have a FS of 10
or 8 respectively for guns, or 2 points for each machine
gun, and a WR of9 as well.
2.43 Vehicle Mobility: Vehicles move during their own
side's Vehicle Movement Phase only. Each Vehicle pos-
sesses two different Movement Allowances printed at
the lower right of the counter. The number to the left of
the slash is its Cross Country rate, the number to the
right is its Road Movement rate. A Vehicle's Movement
Allowance for the turn depends on whether it is mov-
ing on a road or over any other type of terrain.
2.44 Vehicle Size: Some Vehicles were huge and some
were small (relatively speaking, a typical tank itselfat
-------1Candships!-------
this time is 4 to 5 yards wide and 8 to 9 yards long). To
reflect the differences in size, some Vehicles have a size
modifier printed to their middle left which modifies any
Anti-Tank Fire Attack dieroll against it. Vehicles with
no modifier printed are assumed to have a value of"O".
2.45 Vehicle Indicators: If a Vehicle possesses a spe-
cial ability (or defect), a symbol(s) is printed in the lower
left hand comer to indicate this. The meanings of these
symbols are printed in the appropriate portions of the
rules.
EXAMPLE: Tanks with a square outline printed in
the lower left hand comer are considered "hard to
steer" and suffer additional turning penalties.
NOTE: Some extra units have been included in the
mix which are not used in any of the scenarios pro-
vided. These have a small star printed in the lower left
hand comer. Rules and scenarios for these units will
appear in future issues ofthe Clash ofArms newslel/er.
2.46 Vehicle Crews: Most Allied Tanks operate in the
game without bothering about the affects of play upon
the inherent Crew unit(s). However, German Tanks, and
all ACs and Trucks do possess inherent Crew units
which can be affected by play. However, these Crews
are not stacked with their Vehicle until called for by the
rules.
2.5 Aircraft Units
Each Aircraft unit represents one plane. Each sce-
nario will list the available Aircraft types. Certain Air-
craft unit types may only conduct one type of mission.
2.51 Aircraft Type: Printed in the upper left hand cor-
nerofthe counter is a code indicating the aircraft's prin-
ciple mission. Air units which are primarily Fighters
are marked with an "F".
a. Aircraft with a "CS" are primarily Close Support
types. These units may conduct Bombing, Artiller.y
Observation, or Strafing Missions against enemy units.
b. Aircraft with a "B" are primarily Bombers. These
units may only conduct Bombing Missions, but at high
effectiveness.
2.52 Strafe Value: Printed in the lower left hand cor-
ner of the counter is the Aircraft's Strafe Value. This
number is used to determine the effect of a Strafing
Mission conducted by the Aircraft.
2.53 Bombing Factor: Printed in the lower right hand
comer of the counter is the Aircraft's Bombing Factor.
This number is used to determine the effect ofa Bomb-
ing Mission conducted by the Aircraft.
2.54 Air Combat Bonus: Printed in the lower right of
some F type Aircraft is an air to air combat bonus die
roll modifier. This is used only in dogfighting.
2.55 Immunity to Ground Fire: If an aircraft is im-
mune to Small Arms Fire Attacks by ground units, a
black square is printed in the lower left hand comer of
the counter (around the Strafe Value, if any).
2.56 Aircraft Movement Allowances: Aircraft have
unlimited movement each turn and can be placed any-
where on the map.
3.0 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS BEFORE YOU
BEGIN
Before plunging into the main body ofthe rules, cer-
tain concepts are presented here first. Please read them
and get familiar with them.
3.1 Stacking
Stacking refers to the total number of units which
may be in a hex after movement. Units are not restricted
by the stacking limits while moving.
3.11 General Rule: All platoon sized Foot and Cav-
alry Troop units, and Vehicles count towards a hex's
stacking limit. Pinned FT and CT units do count to-
wards the stacking limit but Vehicles which have suf-
fered a Break Down are excluded when calculating the
hex's stacking limit. Crews, Individuals, WUs, and Air-
craft never count towards a hex's stacking limit.
3.12 Stacking Limits: Units may move individually
or in stacks. Up to eight friendly platoon sized FT or
CT units may end their Movement Phase stacked in the
same hex.
NOTE: Large stacks of units make wonderful tar-
gets and are extremely vulnerable to enemyfire a/lacks.
a. A maximum of up to four Vehicles total from ei-
ther side may end their Movement Phase stacked in the
same hex (in addition to the eight FT/CT units allowed).
A hex cannot have five or more Vehicles in it, regard-
less of the owning side.
NOTE: Tank tactics of the period usually assigned
one tank every 200 to 300 meters.
3.13 Close Assault Stacking: An exception to the stack-
ing rules is when entering an enemy occupied hex dur-
ing the Close Assault Phase, stacking limits for both
sides are waived and thus unlimited. That is, either
player can toss in as many platoon sized FT or CT units
as they possess into Close Assault Combat. Since Ve-
hicles are exempt from Close Assault Combat, the stack-
ing limit of four Vehicles per hex remains in effect
whether the hex is enemy or friendly occupied.
3.14 Stacking and Retreats: Should stacking limits
be violated after a retreat, displace the retreating units
any number of extra hexes until the stacking limits are
met.
3.2 Zones of Control
Unlike many other wargames, in Landships! there
are no Zone of Control rules. Due to the tactical nature
of the game, units will naturally exert their own delay-
ing and "no go" spheres of influence.
3.3 Supply Rules
Again, unlike many other wargames, there are no
supply rules. Due to the short period of time portrayed
in a typical scenario, units are considered to always be
"in supply." A scenario's special rules may list some
form of ammo limitation however.
4.0 THE SEQUENCE OF PLAY
This simulation is a two-player game where both
players may move and fire. The game itself is played in
game turns. Each game tum has many phases that fol-
low each other in a strict Sequence of Play. Each game
scenario identifies a First player and a Second player.
The First player remains the First player throughout
the game. The First player follows the Sequence of Play
first and is termed the "phasing player". Some phases
making up the tum are conducted by the Second player
(termed the "non-phasing player''). After the First player
completes his run through the Sequence of Play, the
Second player becomes the phasing player and repeats
the sequence. The First player now becomes the "non-
phasing player." After which, a new turn ensues.
Players may skip over phases, if not applicable, but
the Sequence of Play itself cannot be deviated from.
4.1 First Player's Barrage Phase
a. Nominate target hexes and announce the type of
Barrage and Ammo to be used.
R-3
b. Check for being "in communications" and then
roll on the Fire Order Table (FOT) to see if the request
is honored.
c. Roll for Scatter.
d. Roll on the Barrage Combat Results Table to see
if a Hit has occurred.
e. Resolve the effect of the Hit on all targets in the
hex.
4.2 First Player's Vehicle and Cavalry Movement
(only) Phase
a. Move all Vehicles up to the limit of their Move-
ment Allowances (check Tanks for Break Downs at end
of move). Vehicles intending to engage in Close As-
sault Combat must enter enemy occupied hexes during
this phase.
b. The Second player makes Morale Checks for any
units subject to Tank Fright (only in certain scenarios).
c. Choose the movement mode for any CT units (Trot
or Charge) and move them up to the limit of their Move-
ment Allowance. Mount/Dismount any CT units at the
start or end of this phase if you so wish.
d. The Second player makes Morale Checks for any
units subject to Cavalry Fright that are being Charged.
4.3 Second Player's Defensive AT Fire Phase (vs.
Vehicles only)
a. Only the First player's Vehicles may be fired at
using available Anti-Tank weapons. Any type of en-
emy Vehicle can be attacked. ART and AT guns may
change facing to bring enemy Vehicles within their fi re
arc.
NOTE: Anti-Tank weapons are: friendly Tanks armed
with a main gun, on map ART guns using direct fire,
AT and AA guns, plus Anti-Tank rifles and
Flamethrowers.
4.4 First Player 's 1st Foot Troop Movement Phase
a. All non-pinned Foot Troop units (infantry and MG
platoons, Crews and Individuals) belonging to the First
player may move.
4.5 Second Player 's Defensive SmallArms Fire Phase
a. The Second player's units may fire at any Soft
Targets using Small Arms Fire Attacks (only).
b. The Second player's units may instead fire at any
Vehicles vulnerable to Small Arms Fire Attacks in this
phase. Trucks and ACs can be attacked by any unit with
an FS value, while some early Tanks can be attacked
using MG platoons or Vehicle MGs (mostly scenarios
before April 1917, otherwise MG fire is ineffective).
4.6 Second Player's Pin Removal Phase
a. Any Pinned units belonging to the Second player
recover to normal status.
4.7 Joint Aircraft Phase
a. The First player (having decided before the game
begins what missions his aircraft will perform) places
all of his Aircraft types first, followed by the Second
player placing his F types (only) to intercept.
b. Resolve Air-to-Air combat between opposing F
type Aircraft first, then the Second player's surviving F
types may attack the First player's B and/or CS types..
c. The Second player (only) conducts any AA Fire
Attacks he wishes to.
d. The First player's CS types flying Artillery Obser-
vation Missions may Observe target hexes and adjust
Barrage Attack Target markers.
e. The First player conducts any Bombing (CS and B
types) and Strafing (CS types only) missions he has.
4.8 Joint Close Assault Combat Phase
a. This phase is only conducted when enemy and
friendly units both occupy the same hex, or when non-
vehicle units adjacent to enemy occupied hexes belong-
--------1Landships! - - - - - - - -
ing to the phasing player declare they will initiate Close
Assault Combat and move into them (free move) dur-
ing this phase.
b. Resolve any Close Assault Combats.
4.9 First Player's Offensive Fire Phase
a. All units belonging to the First player which did
not engage in Close Assault Combat this turn may con-
ductAnti-Tank and Small Arms Fire Attacks. However,
no facing changes are pennitted this phase.
4.10 First Player's 2nd Foot Troop Movement Phase
a. All non-pinned Foot Troops belong to the First
player may move again except those that engaged in
Close Assault Combat.
4.11 First Player's Pin Removal Phase
a. Any Pinned units belonging to the First player re-
cover from Pinned to nonnal status. Vehicles which have
suffered a temporary Break Down and did not fire this
turn may try to Repair themselves.
b. Remove any Smokescreens and Gas markers be-
longing to the Second player.
4.12 Second Player Thrn
The Second player becomes the phasing player and
repeats Sections 4.1 through 4.11 reversing the roles of
First and Second player. At the conclusion of this, one
Game Turn is completed and play reverts back to the
original First player.
5.0 THE BARRAGE PHASE
Artillery is simulated in two ways: via abstract "off
board" modules, and more rarely, using actual Artil-
lery (ART) gun counters on the map. However, either
side may have both off board modules and on map ART
guns in a scenario. Normally, ART guns only conduct
indirect fire Barrage Attacks during this phase against
hexes they cannot normally see by utilizing a Forward
Observer. All indirect fire Barrage Attacks must occur
in this phase. However, ifan on map ART gun is within
Spotting range of, and possesses a direct Line of Sight
(LOS) to, an enemy unit, it may conduct a direct fire
Anti-Tank Fire Attack against Vehicles or a Small Arms
Fire Attack (really a Barrage Attack) against Soft Tar-
gets during one of the direct Fire Phases (see Section
5.7). . concur in the need for artillery fire and the Barrage At-
5.1 The Role of the Forward Observer (FO)
Forward Observers are Individuals ~
armed with a telephone and are assumed ~0
to be dragging wire forward as they ad-
vance. Their sole purpose is to observe 0 1
target hexes that ART guns themselves
cannot see, in order to conduct indirect fire Barrage
Attacks against them. Ignore this section if an on map
ART gun is within spotting range of, and possesses a
direct Line of Sight (LOS) to, an enemy unit or hex.
Such units are said to be conducting a direct fire Bar-
rage Attack (see Section 5.7).
5.11 FO Procedure: To conduct an indirect fire Bar-
rage Attack, an unpinned FO must be able to both Ob-
serve the target hex, nominate which guns will fire and
with what, then establish "communications" with his
on map ART guns/off board modules conducting the
indir~t fire Barrage Attack. Next, the FO must then
roll on the Fire Order Table (FOT) to see if his request
for artillery fire is answered.
a. An unpinned FO can Observe any number of hexes
within a 10 hex range to which a unblocked Line of
Sight (LOS) extends from the FO, exclusive of the hex
he occupies, into the target hex (sec Rule 8.23 for LOS
rules). FOs may not Observe into or out of hexes cov-
ered by a Smokescreen. Do not usc the Spotting ranges
printed on the Spotting Chart for FOs. When a hex is
Observed by the FO, simply place the
"cross hairs" Barrage Impact marker on
the hex to designate it as the target hex.
NOTE: "Observing" for indirect fire
Barrage Attacks and "Spotting "for direct Fire Attacks
are two different concepts and are not interchangeable.
b. After Observing the target hex(cs) chosen for the
Barrage Attack(s), the player must state out loud the
number of on map ART guns/off board modules to be
used, the type of Barrage Attack requested, and the
ammo selection. Once made, the choice cannot be
changed during the same turn. There are two types of
Barrage Attack: Drumfire and Hurricane (sec Section
5.2). Only one type may be designated to attack a spe-
cific hex. There are also four types of ammo, High Ex-
plosive, Shrapnel, Smoke and Gas (see Section 5.3).
Only one type may be used to attack a specific hex.
c. Next, the FO must check to sec if he is "in com-
munications" with his artillery unit(s). Once the target
hex has been chosen and successfully Observed, and
the type of attack designated, roll one die per each tar-
get hex nominated. On a roll of 1-3, the FO is not "in
communications" with the units assigned to Barrage
Attack the hex. The stated indirect fire Barrage Attack
does not occur against that targeted hex that turn. Any
on map ART guns/off board modules allocated to that
target hex are wasted that turn but not used up. They
may fire on a subsequent tum. An unpinned FO may
attempt to establish being "in communications" for each
of his targeted hexes once per turn, in hopes of getting
at least one of his nominated attacks to succeed.
d. Finally, before resolving the Barrage Attack, check
to sec how many turns the target hex has been subject
to Small Arms Fire Attacks (by non-artillery units) and
no Retreat or Elimination result (but not,---- - .
Pin) occurred. Markers printed with the Reaisted
1 munlcatlons" and are more likely to be answered on
number of turns resistance to date are pro-
vided to help players keep track of how Tum
many turns have passed. Count the num- .___ _...J
ber ofturns, not the number of times per turn, a hex has
been attacked. Then roll on the Fire Order Table (FOT)
under the column with that number of turns and apply
any die roll modifier listed underneath the table. If a
"F" result occurs, the rear area artillery commanders
tack is fired. Naturally, only the hexes which were tar-
geted earlier by the FO/Aircraft may be attacked. Ifan
"F" result docs not occur, the player must try his other
nominated Barrage Attacks instead.
EXAMPLE: It is Thrn I of a scenario. A. hex con-
taining enemy units is Observed by a FO and may be
fired Opon by any on map ARTguns/offboard modules.
Assume however. there was no effect. During the rest
of 'TUrn I, the enemy units in the hex are also attacked
by the player using Small Arms Fire Attacks but again
to no effect. Place a "Resisted I Thrn " marker on the
hex. On Thrn 2 the same hex is again Observed (by an
Aircraft). No communications check is necessary. Since
the hex was subjected to Small Arms Fire Attacks on
Thrn I that did not result in a Retreat or Elimination,
this counts as one turn towards the cumulative total of
ineffective attacks. So in order to conduct a Barrage
A.ltack, the player must roll on the FOT using the "I "
column (with a -I die roll modification for the Aircraft).
Assume a lucky "F" result occurs so the artillery units
may fire and do so. After checking for Scatter. assume
they hit the target hex but to no effect. (Had an "F"
result not occurred, the artillery assigned to the Bar-
rage Attack would have been wasted). The player does
not direct Small Arms Fire Attacks against the hex dur-
ing the remainder of Thrn 2 (he's busy elsewhere). So
the marker is not increased to "Resisted 2 'TUrns ". Thus
on Thrn 3 during the Barrage Phase, if the hex were
observed by an FO and nominated as a target hex again
and a Fire Order requested, the "I " column would still
R-4
be used (since the hex was subjected to Fire Attack!
once on Thrn I but not on Thrn 2).
Had the player directed Small Arms Fire Attack!
against the hex again on Thrn 2 but still with no result,
then the marker would haveflipped to Its "2" side and
on Thrn 3 the "2 "column would be used, etc. Ifa Small
Arms Fire Attack on Thrn 2 had caused a Elimination
or Retreat, then this would have counted as a success
so the marker would be removed and any other Small
Arms Fire A.ltacks made on this or previous turns are
erased from the count. In this case a Fire Order re·
quest on Thrn 3 against the target hex would use the
"0" column. If a Pin result had occurred at any point,
then the attack (and turn) would still have counted to-
wards the overall number ofturns a hex was Ineffectu-
ally allacked, since the enemy is still in the hex and
thus Is still resisting.
5.12AircraftAs FOs: During the Joint Aircraft Phase,
the phasing player's CS type Aircraft on Artillery Ob-
servation Missions may also act as FOs for indirect fire
Barrage Attack purposes only. They may not Spot for
ground units attempting to conduct Small Arms or Anti-
Tank Fire Attacks (sec Section 8.2). They may auto-
matically Observe any hex within two hexes of the hex
they occupy (again, ignore the spotting ranges printed
on the chart for this purpose). Simply place a "cross
hairs" Barrage Target marker on the hex. Unless the
Aircraft is forced to abort its mission, the attack is re-
solved during the Barrage Phase ofthe owning player's
following turn. Aircraft acting as FOs are always con-
sidered to be "in communications" with any on map
ART guns/off board modules, no roll is necessary. The
FOT is still used however, but with the favorable die
roll modification listed, and still check for Scatter.
NOTE: Because they do not need to checkfor "com·
the FOT. Aircraft are powerfolforce multipliers for each
side's artillery.
5.13 Automatic Observation: In all scenarios, certain
terrain types are always considered automatically "Ob-
served" for indirect fire Barrage Attack purposes.These
include hexes containing, the first (or only) line of en-
emy Trench hexes closest to your side of the map, any
of your own trench lines, the first row of hexes in front
of your own trench line closest to the enemy, any Town
hexes, and any Road Junction hexes on the map. An
FO or Aircraft does not need to Observe these hex types
for the player to conduct indirect fire Barrage Attacks
against them. No communications check is required.
However, a player still needs to roll on the FOT to see
if his rear area artillery commander "agrees" with the
need to fire and still checks for Scattering (sec Rule
5.41).
5.14 First Thrn Barrazes: In all scenarios on the first
turn (only), any Observed hex may be attacked by on
map ART guns/off board modules without checking to
sec if the FO is "in communications," or rolling on the
FOT prior to attacking the hex. Still check for Scatter.
When combined with Rule 5.13 above, this means a
first tum indirect Fire Barrage Attack against an en-
emy Town hex way in the rear would happen automati·
cally without the need for Observation by an FO/Air-
craft, or checking communications, or using the FOT
(simulating pre-planned Fire Orders). On subsequent
turns, use the nonnal procedure (Observe the hex, check
for communications, use the FOT, and check for Scat·
ter).
5.2 Types of Artillery Barrages
Two basic types of indirect fire Barrage Attacks are
possible. Only one type of Barrage Attack may be con·
ducted against a specific hex per turn. Barrage Attack
types are detailed below.
-------1Landships!
5.21 Drumfire Barrage: A Drumfire Barrage is one in
which all the Fire Strengths from all the on map ART
guns/ofT board modules attacking one hex are added
up into one combined total. Any type of ammo may be
used. Drumfire Barrages have a lesser chance of Scat-
ter. Roll a six-sided die once using the proper column
on the Barrage Combat Results Table (BCRT) to re-
solve the attack.
5.22 Hurricane Barrage: A Hurricane Barrage simu-
lates a rapid intense fire. Only High Explosive and
Shrapnel ammo may be used with a Hurricane Barrage.
Hurricane Barrages do Scatter more easily. The player
decides how many on map ART guns/ofT board mod-
ules will attack a target hex. If the attack succeeds, each
such ART gun/off board module will then attack the
chosen hex individually, resolving it's attack on the" l 0"
column of the BRCT and applying any results, before
the subsequent module attacks and so on.
EXAMPLE: The British player has four off board
modules to a/lack with. He selects a High Explosive
Hurricane Barrage. Allfour must a/lack the same hex
selected but each a/lack is resolved individually on the
"10" column ofthe BCRTfor a total offour separate
a/lacks on the hex. Any modifiers for the a/lack apply
separately to each resolution.
a. With Hurricane Barrages, should any one attack
destroy or force the units in the hex to retreat, any fur-
ther attacks on the hex are ignored. The remaining ART
gunsloffboard modules cannot select a new hex to bar-
rage.
EXAMPLE: A hex with one unit in it is subjected to
a Hurricane Barrage. The first ofthree a/lacks results
in the unit becoming Pinned after undergoing a Mo-
rale Check. The second a/lack also results in a Pin on
the unit, so it is forced to Retreat two hexes. The third
auack is wasted on the (now) empty hex.
5.3 Ammo Selection
Each player has four basic types of ammo which he
must designate using prior to resolving the Barrage
Attack upon a hex. Only one type of ammo may be
designated to attack a hex during the Barrage Phase.
5.3 1 High Explosive: The basic ammo type is High
Explosive. High Explosive may be fired using either
Drumfire or Hurricane Barrages. This type of shell
worked better than Shrapnel in that it was effective in
any type of terrain. Thus HE may be used against any
type of target hex containing any terrain type and any
composition of units. Roll on the Barrage Combat Re-
sults Table with no modifications.
a. High Explosive will affect Tanks, ACs and Trucks.
5.32 Shrapnel: The second ammo type is Shrapnel
(similar to shot gun shells which scatter upon impact).
Shrapnel may be fired using either Drumfire or Hurri-
cane Barrages. However it may only be used if the tar-
get hex contains Clear, Woods, Swamp, or Clear ter-
rain with a River in it (but not Clear terrain with a Trench
or Strongpoint) and if the hex contains a minimum of
three platoon sized FT or CT units. If a Hit is scored,
add+ I to the indicated "H" result (whatever the actual
BCRT result) but a miss is still a miss.
EXAMPLE: A hex is a/lacked using Shrapnel and
the result on the BCRT is a "H+ 1". This is adjuste1 up
to an "H+ 2" result. Units rolling for their Morale
Checks would have the die roll modified by+2, not the
stated +1. A "H " result would have been adjusted to
"H+l " and so on.
a. Shrapnel has no effect on Tanks or Annored Cars
but does affect Trucks.
5.33 Smokescreen: Smokescreens may
only be used when indicated by the sce-
nario.lfpermined, each on map ART gun/
off board module may use a Drumfire
Barrage (only) to fire a Smokescreen instead of firing
to damage enemy units. The player states this prior to
firing. Ifa Smokescreen is selected, a player must Ob-
serve the target hex and check for communications (un-
less automatically Observed}, but ignore the FOT re-
quirement. Check each ART gun/off board module in-
dividually for Scatter but do not roll on the BCRT. Place
one Smokescreen marker in the final target hex for each
ART gun/ofT board module that fired. All helCes adja-
cent to the target hex are considered part of the
Smokescreen. Units in Smokescreens cannot be Spot-
ted or Observed and thus cannot be targets of indirect
fire Barrage Attacks, or Anti-Tank or Small Anns Fire
Attacks. Units in Smokescreens cannot Observe or Spot
out either so they may not conduct Fire Attacks.
Smokescreens have no effect on Close Assault Com-
bat. Multiple Smokescreen counters have no extra ef-
IJ
fects. Smokescreens are removed during the opposing
player's tum in Phase 4. 11.
5.34 Gas: Gas Attacks may only be used
when indicated by the scenario and not
before 1915 in any case. lfpennitted, a
Drumfire Barrage (only) may be used to
fire gas shells. The player states this prior to firing. Gas
Attacks require the nonnal indirect fire Barrage Attack
routine to succeed (Observe the hex, check for com-
munications, roll on the FOT and check for Scatter).
Place a Gas marker in the final impact hex. All hexes
within 3 helCes of the marker are considered gassed.
Any Soft Target units and Trucks, present in this three
hex radius, are "Gassed" (see Rule 5.54). Tanks and
ACs are exempt from Gas Attacks (for simplicity). Gas
remains in effect for two game turns, remove the marker
at the end of the opposing player's last phase in the
tum.
5.4 Resolving Indirect Fire Barrage Attacks
After observing the hex to be attacked, and deter-
mining the type of Barrage Attack called in, players
resolve the attack using the rules below.
5.41 Scatter Check: All .-----~-----,
1
indirect fire Drumfire and
Hurricane Barrage Attacks
are subject to Scattering 6 2
before determining if a Hit
is scored. Ignore this rule
for direct fire Barrage At-
tacks. Prior to rolling on 5 3
the BCRT, roll one die to
see if the Barrage Attack 4
Scattered into an adjacent L----....::._ _ ___.
hex.
a. A Drumfire Barrage is more planned, so roll the
die once for all the units planning to Barrage Attack
(not one roll per module targeting the hex). The entire
Barrage Attack will only Scatter if a 5-6 is rolled.
EXCEPTION: Roll individually for each ART gun/
offboard module when firing a Smokescreen.
b. A Hurricane Barrage is a series of rapid volleys,
more likely to Scatter. Again roll one die once for all
the weapons planning to Hurricane Barrage (not one
roll per ART gun/module targeting the hex) and on a
roll of 4-6, they Scatter.
c.lfthe Barrage Attack Scatters, one of the six adja-
cent hexes will become the new target hex into which
the previously announced attack will impact regardless
whether friendly units are present. A second die is rolled
and checked against the Scatter diagram printed on each
map to indicate which adjacent hex the Barrage Attack
will hit. Any enemy (or friendly) units that are in the
new target hex are subject to the results of the Barrage.
EXCEPTION: Should a Gas Auack Scalier onto
friendly units, there is no effect (they are presumed to
be readyfor such possibilities).
R -5
5.42 Barrage Fire Strengths: Now add up the num-
ber of on map ART guns/off board modules attacking
the hex. With lligh Explosive or Shrapnel, each ART
gun/ofT board module attacks with a Fire Strength (FS)
of I0 per ART gun/ofT board module.
EXAMPLE: A single on map ART gun fires with a
FS of I0. Two ofT board artillery modules would have a
FS of I0 each, for a total of 20.
5.43 Determining the Result: For a Drumfire Barrage,
add up the FSs impacting on the target hex and find the
column on the Barrage Combat Results Table (BCRT)
corresponding to this number. Roll one die, adjust for
any terrain modifiers and see if a Hit has been scored.
EXAMPLE: Th e British player has chosen to con-
duct a Drumfire Barrage against a Clear terrain hex
with three off board modules with a total FS of30 (3 x
10 =30). Locate the +30co/umn on the BCRTand roll
the die once with no modifiers.
a. When targeting a hex with a Hurricane Barrage,
each on map ART gun/off board module fires and re-
solves its attack separately using the " 10" column on
theBCRT,
b. In either case above, the terrain modifiers listed
by the BCRT apply to the die rolls.
5.5 Indirect Fire Barrage Results
All indirect fire BCRT results are expressed in tenns
of"Hits".
5.51 Hits on Foot Troops: In general, if Foot Troop
unit(s) are in a hex that is "Hit", all units must undergo
a Morale Check. The Morale Check is conducted after
a Hit is achieved. Any modifications applicable will
apply to the Morale Check. When an indirect fire Bar-
rage Attack hits, only one Morale Check roll per hex is
made (not a separate check for each unit in the hex).
The result applies to all Foot Troop units within the
hex (including any Crews or Individuals except TLs).
Units which roll less than or equal to the printed MR
pass the Morale Check and are automatically Pinned
(see Section 9.2). Units which roll over their printed
MR fail and are Eliminated. !fan already Pinned unit
suffers another Pin result, it must Retreat two hexes
instead and remain Pinned.
EXAMPLE: A hex is the target of an indirect Fire
Barrage Attack and a "Hit+1" result is scored. There
are two enemy platoon sized FT units in the hex. One
unit has a MR of 4, the other a MR of 5. Assume the
single Morale Check die rollfor both units is a 4, modi-
fied up to a 5. The unit with a MR of 4 is Eliminated,
the other unit is Pinned.
5.52 Hits on Cavalry Troops: When conducting an
indirect fire Barrage Attack against mounted CT unit(s)
subtract-! from the BCRT die roll. Otherwise no other
die roll modifiers apply. Cavalry never receives terrain
die roll modi tiers during a Barrage Attack except for
being in a Woods or Town hex.
a. If a Hit occurs, all CT units undergo the nonnal
Morale Check procedure resulting from the Hit. If not
Eliminated, roll the die a second time for each CT unit
in the hex. On a roll of a "I", enough horses of the CT
unit are killed to effectively "dismount" the unit. Re-
place that CT unit with the equivalent infantry or MG
platoon (in Pinned status of course).
5.53 Hits on Weapon Units: For High Explosive at-
tacks only, if any WUs are in the target hex, after re-
solving the effect on the Soft Targets, roll the die again
for each WU. A roll of I or 2 destroys that WU . Other-
wise, no effect occurs.
5.54 Hits on Vehicles: For High Explosive attacks only,
if a Tank or AC takes a "Hit", roll the die again, once
per Vehicle. A roll of"l" destroys it. Otherwise no ef-
fect. Shrapnel and Gas have no effect on Tanks or ACs.
-------1Landships!-------
a. Trucks, unlike Tanks andACs, are very vulnerable
to indirect fire BarrageAttacks. lfa Hit with either High
Explosive or Shrapnel is achieved on the BCRT, the
inherent Crew must undergo a Morale Check. If the
Crew fails the MC, the Truck is destroyed. If the Crew
passes, the Crew and Truck are Pinned instead. Place a
"Pinned" side Crew counter on the Truck. No move-
ment is permitted until the Crew recovers, after which
the counter is removed and the Truck may move nor-
mally.
5.55 Hits on Wire Markers: If the final Barrage FS is
30 or more, and the target hex contains a Wire marker,
then on a natural roll of a "I" on a six sided die, the
marker is removed.
OPTIONAL RULE: Historically. a side could Bar-
rage Auack for up to a week and still not get alithe
Wire destroyed. Players may wish to require a second
"confirming " throw of a 1-3 to allow Wire marker re-
moval as the result ofa indirect fire Barrage A/lack.
5.56 Gas Attack Results: The first Hit by a Gas At-
tack causes all Soft Targets and Trucks within the 3
hex Gas radius to be automatically Pinned. Gas has no
effect on Tanks or ACs. Terrain and a unit's MR has no
effect on a Gas Attack. Thus, units which are Gassed
cannot fire nor move until the Gas marker is removed.
Cavalry Troop units are immediately "demounted" for
the rest of the game. If a subsequent Hit of any sort
occurs on a Gassed unit, the defender's printed MR is
reduced by one if forced to undergo a subsequent Mo-
rale Check. Units under the effects of Gas which are
forced to Retreat are Eliminated instead. Gas effects
only last while the Gas marker is present in the hex.
a. Friendly units which enter a Gassed zone suffer
no effects (again, it is assumed they have been put on
notice).
5.6lndirect Fire Restrictions
A hex which is Observed by a FO or Aircraft can
only be attacked in this phase using indirect fire Bar-
rage Attacks. A Pinned FO cannot Observe any hexes.
A FO alone in a hex entered by enemy platoon sized
FT or CT units or Vehicles is eliminated. Ifall the FOs
on a side are lost, indirect fire Barrage Attacks may
only be directed at the hex types listed under Rule 5.13
(Automatic Observation) unless Aircraft Observe (see
Rule 5.12). On map ART guns conducting indirect fire
must have the target hex in their firing arc as well (see
Rule 8.12).
a. On map ART guns that conduct indirect fire Bar-
rage Attacks during this phase may still conduct Anti-
Tank or Small Arms Fire Attacks against enemy Ve-
hicles or units during the Defensive Fire Phases in the
opposing player's tum. They may not fire during their
own Offensive Fire Phase of the same tum. If a player
fires his on map ART guns during a Defensive Fire
Phase, they may still conduct Barrage Attacks in his
following player tum.
5.7 Direct Fire Attacks
If an on map ART gun has an unpinned Crew counter,
is within Spotting range (see Section 8.2) of an enemy
unit, has a Line of Sight to the unit, and is facing in the
correct direction, it may conduct a direct fire Anti-Tank
or Small Arms Fire Attack in the appropriate Fire Phase
(but not during the Barrage Phase). No FO is required,
no check for "communications" is made, no Barrage
type and Ammo need be declared, the FOT is not used,
and no Scatter occurs. A player simply follows the pro-
cedure for Anti-Tank or Small Arms Fire Attacks. All
ART guns conduct direct Anti-Tank Fire Attacks inde-
pendently against Vehicles but combine their FS val-
ues together when firing at Soft Targets and use the
Small Arms Combat Results Table and procedure. All
ART guns operating in a direct fire mode have a Small
Arms Fire Strength value of I0.
NOTE: Pmvar strategists extolled the baulejield vir-
tues of the quick firing artillery gun as the wonder
weapon ofthe next war. Players willfind a ballery of4
to 6 guns a formidable opponent to take with only in-
fantry.
6.0 VEHICLE AND CAVALRY MOVEMENT
PHASE
Vehicles and Cavalry Troop units move during the
phasing player's Vehicle and Cavalry Movement Phase.
No movement by friendly Foot Troops units may oc-
cur at this time, nor may enemy units move. Note that
after this phase is over, the non-phasing player con-
ducts his Defensive Anti-Tank Fire Phase.
6.1 Vehicle Movement
During the phasing player's tum, he may move his
Vehicle units during the Vehicle Movement Phase.
Movement is a general term whereby players physi-
cally displace their units hex-by-hex over the map sur-
face.
6.11 Movement Procedure: A Vehicle's full Move-
ment Allowance is available every tum and is expressed
in terms of Movement Points (MPs). Vehicles possess
both a Cross-Country and Road Mode Movement Al-
lowance. The distance that may be moved depends on
both the Vehicle Movement Allowance and whether it
is moving on a road or cross country. A player must
announce whether a Vehicle will be using its Cross-
Country or Road Mode Movement Allowance during
it's move. Vehicles may expend any amount ofMPs so
long as no one individual Vehicle expends more MPs
in a single Movement Phase than its overall Movement
Allowance. As a Vehicle moves, the player should con-
sult the Terrain Effects Chart (TEC) for any effects of
terrain as needed. In general, all terrain types cost Ve-
hicles I MP, even crossing a Trench or climbing a Hill
doesn't increase it. Certain Vehicles are however, pro-
hibited from entering certain terrain types.
EXAMPLE: A Tank with an Cross-Country Move-
ment Allowance of 4 MPs is moved across the map
through Clear terrain. As the Tank expends I MP per
Clear terrain hex. the cost to enter the hex {I MP) is
subtracted/rom the Tank's Movement Allowance. When
it's Movement Allowance is exhausted for the turn af
ter 4 hexes. the Tank must stop.
a. Vehicles face in the direction of the arrow printed
in the upper left hand comer and generally must move
into the hex directly ahead of them or tum in place (no
sideslipping allowed)!
b. Vehicles intending to engage in Close Assault Com-
bat this tum must end their move in the enemy occu-
pied hex. Vehicles do not receive the bonus one hex
move given to FT and CT units during the Close As-
sault Phase.
6.12 Road Mode: For Vehicles to use their Road Mode
Movement Rate, the Vehicle must begin on a Road hex.
Also, a Vehicle which begins its move on a Road may
usc its higher Road Mode rate only if it plans to con-
tinue moving along the Road{s). The Road rate is only
available if the Vehicle is moving along a continuous
path of Road hexes. A Vehicle which opts for Road
Mode must immediately stop should it move off the
Road.
a. If the Vehicle began on a non-road hex, it must use
its Cross-Country Movement rate. A Vehicle which
begins on non-road hexes may only use its Cross-Coun-
try Movement rate even if the Vehicle subsequently
moves on to a Road (for simplicity).
b. Despite how the roads are drawn on the map, for
movement purposes friendly roads negate friendly
trench lines, but enemy trenches negate enemy roads.
- R -6
6.13 Changing Vehicle Facing: Vehicles may change
their facing, and thus their Fire Arcs, by expending Ill
additional +I MP either during, or prior to, movement
A Vehicle can change its facing to any hexside and con·
tinue moving. A Vehicle may change facing sevmJ
times during the course of its move so long as it has the
extra MPs to expend. Moving along a road may re-
quire the Vehicle to change facing to follow the road
(at a cost of+ I MP) in order to use its Road Mode rate.
Changing facing may only occur during the owning
player's Vehicle Movement Phase (and not during the
Offensive Fire Phase for example). Vehicles may change
facing regardless of the presence of other units in the
In
hex.
6.14 Hard to Steer Vehicles: Hard to Steer A g
Veh~cles (?rinc~pally_Tanks) have a square
outhne pnnted m theu lower left hand cor-
ncr. A Hard to Steer Vehicle is required to
0 315
expend an additional +I MP in order to change it's fac·
ing. For example, the British Mk. I and IV Tanks, the
French Schneider and the German Vollmer Tank must
expend an additional + I MP to tum and/or change fac.
ing (for an overall cost of +2 MPs, +I MP to change
facing plus an additional + I MP for being Hard to
Steer).
EXCEPTION: When a Hard to Steer Vehicle is mol'-
ing along a Road. it does not have to expend the ertra
+IMP to changefacing (again for simplicity) although
it still costs the basic +IMP to do so.
a. The Whippet Tank proved to be fast (8 mph) but
extremely difficult to steer. To symbolize this, a scatter
symbol has been printed in the lower left hand corner.
If a Whippet Tank moves over half its Movement AI·
lowance (in either mode) during the Vehicle Movement
Phase, roll one die. If the roll is 1-2, the driver has lost
control in the last hex the Tank entered. Roll the die
again and consult the Scatter diagram printed on the
map. The result is the new facing of the Tank. Reorient
it {this is free). Restoring its original facing will of
course require I MP next tum.
6.15 Movement Restrictions: Any Vehicle's unspent
MPs may not be accumulated from tum to tum, nor
loaned by one unit to another. Vehicles may not "throw
it into reverse" while moving, but must change facing
in the hex instead.
EXCEPTION: British Mk. V and Mk. VII/Tanks and
the German A7V may move in reverse straight back
one hex per turn.
a. Tanks may NEVER enter any Woods, Swamp or
River hexes, they may move into all other hex typeS.
Tanks may freely enter enemy and friendly occupied
hexes.
EXCEPTION: Renault FT-17 (or variants) tanlcs may
enter Woods hexes but must add+ Ito any Break Down
rolls they undergo that turn.
b. ACs may NEVER enter any Trench, Wire, Woods,
Swamp or River hexes, they may move into all other
hex types. They may only move up hill if along a Road,
otherwise they may not do so. ACs may freely enter
enemy and friendly occupied hexes.
c. Trucks may NEVER enter any Trench, Wire,
Woods, Swamp or River hexes, they may move into all
other hex types. They may only move up hill ifalong a
Road, otherwise they may not. Unlike Tanks and ACs,
Trucks may not freely enter enemy occupied hexes of
their own volition, but may freely exit them during the
Vehicle Movement Phase.
d. Vehicles may not exit the map unless the scenario
permits it.
EXCEPTION: See Module 15.0 on German Tank
Cmv Morale.
-------1Landships! - - - - - - -
6.1 6 Tank Breakdowns: After each Tank
moves, it may Break Down. The chance
ofBreak Down is dependent on how many
hexes it moved and the Tank type. As the
Tank moves, simply keep track of the number of hexes
entered (not Movement Points expended). After move-
ment, find the correct column on the Tank Break Down
Chart, check for modifiers due to Tank type and roll
one ten-sided die. If the roll is equal to or greater the
number on the chart, the Tank has suffered a Break
Down and may not change facing nor move until re-
paired. It may still fire.
EXCEPTION: No Break Down roll occurs for Tanks
that change facing within the same hex as long as the
Tank does not exit the hex during the Vehicle Move-
ment Phase. Note that they haven 'ttechnically moved
a hex to incur a chance ofBreak Down.
EXAMPLE: A French Schneider (notorious for
breaking down) moves three hexes. Locating the cor-
rect column, an adjusted roll of"/0" is needed to Break
Down. The die roll is a 8, but there is a +2 modifier for
Schneider Tanks listed on the chart so the roll becomes
a "10". The evil reputation follows the tank and it
Breaks Down.
a.lfthe Tank suffers a Break Down, next roll a six-
sided die and consult the Type of Breakdown Chart for
the seriousness of the fault. On an initial roll of3-6 the
problem is serious. The Tank has suffered a permanent
Break Down. Do not remove it. A Tank with a penna-
nent Break Down may not move or change facing for
the rest of the scenario but may conduct Fire Attacks
and blocks the Line of Sight through the
hex. Place a Break Down marker (one TEMP.
with the PERM. side backprinted on it) May Fire
Repair 1-2
on the Tank. On a roll of 1-2, the problem
is considered temporary. Place a Break
Down marker (one with the TEMP. side backprinted
on it) on the Tank. The Tank may not change facing or
move until repaired. It may conduct Fire Attacks. Ifit
does not conduct Fire Attacks during the Offensive Fire
Phase, then on a following Pin Removal Phase of th~
sequence, the player may roll a six-sided die. A roll of
1 or 2 is assumed to fix the problem and the Tank is
allowed to resume moving. Remove the Break Down
marker.
b. A tank containing a Tank Leader may apply his -
1modifier both to the initial Break Down roll (ten-sided
die), the Type of Break Down roll (six-sided die), and
the Repair roll (six-sided die).
c. ACs and Trucks never Break Down from moving.
OPTIONAL RULE: The player rolling for Break
Downs may keep the nature (either PERM or TEMP)
of the fault secret from the opposing player. He may
make fake Repair rolls for Tanks suffering permanent
Break Downs. This adds to the suspense.
6.2 Vehicle Movement
Some terrain types require special rules when deal-
ing with Vehicles.
6.21 Wire Hexes: When Tanks enter a Wire hex, sim-
ply remove the Wire marker. Wire has no effect on
Tanks. Only Tanks can remove Wire markers by mov-
ing into or through them, thus creating a gap for FT or
CT units to follow.
a. ACs and Trucks may NEVER enter Wire hexes.
6.22 Trench Hexes: In general, Tanks may freely cross
Trench hexes. However, certain Tanks have poor trench
crossing ability. These are printed with a"=" in the lower
left hand comer. Such Tanks must undergo a special
Break Down check (see Rule 6.16) in place of the nor-
mal check upon entering or moving along each enemy
(not fiiendly) Trench hex. Roll one die against the"Poor
Trench Crosser" column on the Tank Break Down
Chart. Use no modifiers except for the presence of
Rough terrain or a Tank Leader on board. If the Tank
Breaks Down, a second check for the Type of Break
Down is required (see Rule 6.16a). Thus a Tank may
clear the Trench hex with no effect, or suffer a tempo-
rary or pennanent Break Down in the hex, based on the
die rolls. Temporary Break Downs may be Repaired as
nonnal. Other Tanks are free to try to cross the same
enemy Trench hex, regardless of the success shared by
other Tanks.
NOTE: A poor "trench crosser" in this context is
any Tank incapable ofsurmounting a 6ft. wide trench.
Later in the war. trenches expanded to over 12ft. wide,
but Tanks would counter by carryingfascines (a por-
table bridge). Tanks do not checkfor Break Downs when
moving through friendly Trench hexes as bridges are
assumed to have been built for them.
a. ACs and Trucks may NEVER enter Trench hexes.
6.23 Rough Terrain: If the scenario designates some
of or all the Clear terrain hexes as "Rough" terrain (in-
dicating heavily shelled, waterlogged, or hilly terrain-
i.e. poor Tank country in general), add an additional+ 1
to all Initial Tank Break Down rolls.
6.24 Minefields: Map 8 has a belt of Minefield hexes
printed on it. In those scenarios where the Minefields
are "active", if enemy Vehicles enter a Minefield hex,
they must immediately undergo a Minefield attack. Each
scenario lists the Minefield attack die roll ranges and
effects for Vehicles. 1fa Vehicle Breaks Down, roll again
to determine the severity. If the result is no effect, Ve-
hicles may keep moving.
a. Minefields are never used up by Vehicles. They
can attack again and again. However, once through the
Minefield hexes, Vehicles do not have to roll again (i.e.
the Minefield belt is only one hex wide).
b. Friendly Vehicles may move through Minefield
IS! I
hexes with no penalty (they know where they are!)
63C•"'"M•-·"
Mounted CT units move only once per · ing the Defensive Fire Phase.
tum during the phasing player's Vehicle
and Cavalry Movement Phase, and after ' 10/20
any Vehicles on his side have moved. Dismounted CT
units move during the Foot Troop Movement Phases
instead.
6.31 Cavalry Modes: CT units may operate either in
mounted or dismounted mode. Mounting or dismount-
ing may be done in this phase and costs only 1 MP to
do either. Mounting and dismounting may not be vol-
untarily done within Spotting range of an enemy unit
capable of conducting a Small Arms Fire Attack or di-
rect fire Barrage Attack against the hex the action is
taking place in. To show a CT unit in mounted mode,
simply use the CT units provided in the mix as is. To
show the CT unit is dismounted, place a corresponding
infantry or MG platoon unit with the same MR as the
CT unit (player's choice) on top of the CT unit. It is
then treated as a regular infantry or MG platoon for all
purposes.
6.32 Cavalry Speeds: CT units have two speeds re-
gardless of terrain: Trotting and Charging. Trotting cav-
alry has a Movement Allowance of I0, Charging units
have a Movement Allowance of 20. Only one rate of
movement may be used in a given tum. Units moving
at the Trot rate have no facing or turning restrictions,
they may move in any direction freely. Charging units
are more restricted (see Rule 6.33 below).
a. Mounted CT units moving at either rate may enter
("jump across") or move along a Trench hex by ex-
pending 3 MPs per Trench hex entered. They may also
enter Wire hexes (again ·~umping'') by expending 5 MPs
per Wire hex. They can enter River hexes (but not move
R-7
along them) by expending 3 MPs per River hex en-
tered, but must use the Trot speed during that Move-
ment Phase.
6.33 Charge Attacks: CT units may conduct Charges
against Spotted enemy units during the Cavalry Move-
ment Phase in hopes ofengaging them during the Close
Assault Phase. Players may not Charge unspotted en-
emy units.This is the only way mounted CT units may
"attack" enemy units. CT units that wish to move at the
Charge rate must be within 20 MPs of an enemy unit to
be Charged. Charging is a "violent launching" of the
cavalry and as such may only be conducted in one di-
rection and in a straight line along a row of hexes.
EXCEPTION: Charging units that intend to engage
in Close Assault Combat may conduct afinal advance
into any one of their front three hexes during the free
bonus one hex move permilled during the Close As-
sault Phase.
6.34 Cavalry Fright: A Charging cavalry unit is a rather
unnerving event when at close range. To simulate this,
all enemy Soft Target units, including Crews and FOs
(but not TLs), in Clear terrain (or in Trenches or
Strongpoints in Clear terrain) that are the target of a
Charge must make an individual Morale Check when
the enemy CT unit is two hexes away. As soon as the
CT unit moves adjacent to the enemy unit, it must un-
dergo a second Morale Check, adding +l to this die
roll.
EXCEPTION: If the enemy units are in a Trench or
Strongpoint in Clear terrain, instead subtract I from
both rolls. If the units are in any other non-Clear ter-
rain type. they are not subject to Cavalry Fright.
a. The defending units undergo these Morale Checks
only once per phase no matter how many CT units are
within fright range. Roll a die for each unit checking.
If the roll is less than or equal to the unit's printed MR,
the unit passes. Defending units which fail either Mo-
rale Check immediately assume Pinned status. Those
which pass may conduct Small Arms Fire Attacks dur-
b. The CT unit may not enter the defender's hex in
this phase, but must do so during the Close Assault
Phase instead.
NOTE: To recap, the Charging CTunit simply stops
when within two hexes, the enemy unit(s) undergo a
Morale Check, then the CT unit moves adjacent and a
second Morale Check is made.
6.35 Movement Restrictions: A rate of speed must be
chosen for each group ofthree cavalry units the friendly
Player possesses, prior to moving the units (declare the
mode for the first set of three units, then for the next
three, etc.). Such groups of three units must attempt to
stay adjacent or stacked and maneuver together.
a. No portion of a Charge move may be conducted
up hill. CT units moving at Charge speed may not tum
or alter their facing during the move. CT units travel-
ing at Trot speed may tum or alter facing and move up
hill.
b. CT units may not dismount after moving at the
Charge rate, but may do so after moving at the Trot·
rate.
c. CT units may not enter enemy occupied hexes ex-
cept during the free bonus move in the Close Assault
Phase.
7.0 THE FOOT TROOP MOVEMENT PHASES
All Foot Troop units (including dismounted CT units)
move during the phasing player's two Foot Troop Move-
ment Phases. No Vehicle or mounted CT unit move-
ment by may occur at these times, nor may enemy units
move.
-------j[Qndshipsr
7.1 General Rule
Movement is a general term whereby players physi-
cally displace their units hex-by-hex over the map sur-
face. During the phasing player's tum, he may move
his FT units during both of the appropriate phases.
Movement of FT units is handled in a similar manner
as Vehicles but the have no facing or turning restric-
tions. They do have MPAIIowances as do Vehicles, but
it is only I MP. The distance that may be moved de-
pends on the unit moving, whether it is moving over
cross country, along Roads or along contiguous Trench
hexes. Otherwise, terrain has no effect on FT unit move-
ment.
NOTE: Remember. FT units may move twice per turn
overall, bill only IMP per Foot Troop Movement Phase.
7.11 Terrain Costs: FT units move with I MP per
Movement Phase. As all non-road and non-trench hexes
cost I MP to enter, in practical terms FT units will
mostly move only one hex per phase. However, if the
Fr unit is moving across a continuous path of Road or
Trench hexes, it does so at the rate of 112 MP per hex
and thus can move two hexes per phase. So to move
two hexes, Fr units must begin and end movement on
a Road or Trench hex. Fr units may carry man por-
table WUs (AT rifles, Flamethrowers, etc.), with no ef-
fect on their movement ability.
a. Rivers may be designated as fordable or non-ford-
able by FT units in the scenario. Fordable rivers may
be crossed by entering the River hex in one Movement
Phase and exiting the next. Non-fordable rivers may
only be crossed at bridges.
7.12 Enemy Occupied Hexes: Friendly FT units may
not enter enemy occupied hexes except during the Close
Assault Phase. When friendly and enemy units start the
turn jointly occupying the same hex, each side's units
are "frozen in place". This means neither player's units
can exit the hex until all enemy units are eliminated
although additional friend ly units could enter the hex
(and be frozen also). FT units frozen in place must re-
solve Close Assault Combat during the Close Assault
Phase until only one side remains.
NOTE: This rule does apply to CT units as well, but
r!
not to Vehicles which are always free to exit an enemy
occupied hex.
7.13 Wire Hexes: FT units which enter
a Wire hex suffer a one half reduction of
their FS (round down) and their MR is Wi
immediately reduced to 3. CT units in tre
Wire suffer this penalty too. Once the unit has left the
Wire hex, it 's normal printed FS and MR return.
NOTE: Only Tanks can remove Wire counters by
moving through or into them and creating a gap for the
FT (or CT) units to follow (see Rule 6.21).
7.14Minefields: Map 8 has a belt of Minefield hexes
printed on it. In those scenarios where the Minefields
are "active", ifenemy FT (or CT) units enter a Minefield
hex, they must immediately undergo a Minefield at-
tack. Each scenario lists the Minefield attack die roll
ranges and the effects on soft targets.lfthe result is no
effect, the units may keep moving if they have any MPs
left.
a. Mine fields are never used up by FT (or CT) units.
They can attack again and again. However, once through
the Minefield hexes, the units do not have to roll (i.e.
the Minefield belt is only one hex wide).
b. Friendly Fr (and CT) units may move through
Minefield hexes with no penalty (they know where they
are!)
7.15 Moving Weapon Units: Players may not move
AT, AA or ART guns out of the hex they occupy once
set up. They may not change WU facing during the
owning player's Movement Phases. Facing may be
changed during owning player's Defensive Fire Phase(s)
only.
a. For man-portable WUs, any number of AT rifles,
and up to three Flamethrowers, may be carried by a
single infantry or MG platoon sized unit, with no move-
ment penalties. Individuals may not carry WUs of any
sort.
8.0 FIRE ATIACKS
Combat is a term used when either side conducts
Fire Attacks against enemy units which can be seen
and are within Weapons Range. Attacks can either be
Anti-Tank Fire Attacks (ATFAs) directed against Ve-
hicles (regardless of the source) or Small Arms Fire
Attacks (SAFAs) directed against at soft targets like
infantry platoons (again regardless of the source). To
conduct either type of Fire Attack, a unit must first de-
termine if it is facing properly, then it must be able to
Spot the target hex, then determine that a Line of Sight
exists between the attacker and the target, and finally,
make sure that the target hex is within Weapons Range
of the attacker.
8.1 Facing and Fire Arcs
ART and AT guns, and most Vehicles armed with
guns of some sort need to be concerned about how the
unit's front faces which hexside after movement. Some
other unit types (like AA guns) have a 360 degree abil-
ity to fire into any hex within range and need not be
concerned with facing.
8.11 Definitions: The front of a Vehicle is designated
by a small triangle on the counter. The front of an ART
and AT gun is shown by both a small triangle and the
gun barrel direction. The front of counter depicts the
unit's facing which in tum defines a unit's fire arc.
8.12 The Fire Arc: For ART and AT guns, the fire arc
is simply a group of hexes which are within a unit's
front. These hexes expand outward from the front of
the unit forming a "V" shape cone. For Vehicles, each
main gun and MG has its own unique fire arc as de-
fined by the fire arc diagrams printed in the center of
the Scenario book. Enemy units within range and in
the firing arc can be attacked. Units within range, but
outside the fire arc cannot be attacked until they fall
within the firing arc. With units facing a hex side, the
fire arc begins with that hexside. A corollary is that a
WU or Vehicle's fire arcs may overlap.
All AT and
ART Guns
8.2 Spotting and Lines of Sight (LOS)
The range at which a unit can Spot its target and the
Line of Sight (LOS) between the two determines
whether a unit can be attacked.
8.21 Spotting Ranges: To conduct an attack, the firing
unit must not only be facing correctly, but must also be
within Spotting range of the target (sec the Spotting
Table). Spotting range is counted from the hex the at-
tacker occupies (exclusive) to the target hex (inclusive).
R -8
8.22 Automatic Spotting: An enemy unit which fires
during either Defensive Fire Phase is automatically
Spotted, by friendly units within I0 hexes of it, even if
normally out of Spotting range unless there is no Line
of Sight to it. Such an unit can be fired upon by the
phasing player's units during his Offensive Fire Phase,
unless the LOS path to the unit is blocked or the target
is out of Weapons Range. Likewise, a friendly unit
which fires during the Offensive Fire Phase is auto-
matically Spotted by all enemy units within 10 hexes
of it during the following player tum, even if normally
out of Spotting range, unless the LOS path to the unit
is blocked.
8.23 Lines of Sight (LOS): The LOS is defined as a
line from the firing unit's hex to the target hex traced
from the center of the two hexes. The LOS is blocked
if the line passes through a hex containing any of the
following:
I) friendly unpinned FT and CT platoon sized units
(the LOS is not blocked if it passes through friendly
Pinned units or enemy FT or CT units of any sort), or;
2) Tanks, but not ACs or Trucks or WUs, or;
3) Smokescreen hexes. Units may not trace a LOS
into or out of a Smokescreen hex, or;
4) Town, Hill , Wood or Strongpoint hexes. Only if
these terrain types lie between the attacker and defender
is the LOS blocked, but do not count the terrain the
target is in. Note that Wire hexes do not block the LOS,
and;
S) For terrain on Hills, if the target is on higher ter-
rain level than the attacker is, or vice versa, the LOS is
not blocked unless a blocking Town, Hill, Wood or
Strongpoint hex is in the LOS path and adjacent to the
target hex.
EXAMPLE: If the target is on higher ground and
the LOS moves through a Woods hex which is on the
same level as the target and adjacent to it, the LOS is
blocked. This would apply even if the situation was re-
versed. i.e. the target was on lower ground and the fir-
ing unit on higher ground.
a. Ift he LOS is blocked by friendly units or terrain,
the target cannot be fired upon.
8.24 Becoming Unspotted: A unit remains Spotted
until it eliminates all enemy units which Spotted it, or
it moves to a new location from which it is out of Spot-
ting range or no LOS exists to it .
8.3 The Defensive Fire Phases
It is important to note that there are two separate
Defensive Fire Phases during the phasing player's tum,
the first is a Defensive Anti-Tank Fire Phase, the sec-
ond is a Defensive Small Arms Fire Phase. During these
Defensive Fire Phases, the non-phasing player's units
can conducttheappropriate type of Fire Attack against
Spotted units belonging to the phasing player. How-
ever, units may only fire in one phase or the other.
8.31 Rates of Fire: During the Defensive Anti-Tank
Fire Phase, units may only conduct ATFAs against en-
emy Vehicles (if they have such a capability). If they
do have such a capability, then during the Defensive
Anti-Tank Fire Phase, each single AT rifle, AT, AA or
ART gun can each fire three times (this reflects the rate
of fire these weapons were capable of). Flamethrowers
may fire only once.
NOTE: Platoon sized units carrying man-portable
WUs can conduct ATFAs during this phase and again
fire once during the Defensive Small Arms Fire Phase,
making a normal Small Arms Fire Attacks against an
enemy Soft Targets (like enemy platoons).
EXAMPLE: The British player has a Tank adjacent
to a hex occupied by a German MG platoon armed with
two AT rifles. During the Defensive Anti-Tank Fire
Phase, the German player could fire his AT Rifles a
- - - - - - - 1 U lndshipsi - - - - - - - -
Iolal ofsix times (three each). Now assume during the
British player's 1st FOOl Troop Movement Phase, an
infantry platoon moves within Weapons Range of the
MG platoon and is Spotted. During the Defensive Small
Arms Fire Phase the German MG platoon may con-
duct a Small Arms Fire Attack againsllhe enemy infan-
try platoon using his own MG platoon 's printed FS (but
the AT rifles are useless). During the British player's
Offensive Fire Phase, the British player's Tank and in-
fan try platoon may return the fire.
a. During the Defensive Small Anns Fire Phase, on
map ART guns may fire once. {AT and AA guns have
no SAFA capability against Soft Targets).
8.32 Changing Facing: During one of {not both) the
Defensive Fire Phase{s) only, immobile AT, AA and
ART guns {only) belonging to the non-phasing player
may change facing {rotate in place) before firing. These
units cannot change facing during their own friendly
Movement Phase{s) or Offensive Fire Phase. In order
to change facing, the Crew manning the wu must not
be Pinned and must be stacked with the wu. WUs may
change facing regardless of the presence of other units
in the hex. If they do change facing, the ATFA To Hit
roll for that phase is modified adding +2 to the roll {in
addition to any other modifiers that apply, like initial
acquisition of target, see Rule 8.56). Should the first
target be eliminated, the WU may change facing again
to another hexside immediately prior to firing. The sec-
ond To Hit roll against another target would again be
modified by adding +2 for previously rotating in the
hex {and another +2 for acquiring a new target).
EXAMPLE: Two British Tanks end their Movement
Phase. A German AT gun, who's facing needs to be
rotated first to fire on them, does so. The first shot is
modified by +4 (+2 changing/acing and+ 2/or acqui-
sition ofa new target). If it misses, their second shot
would be at +3 (+2 for changing facing, +I for the
second shot at same target) and if that misses, their
third shot is assumed to have acquired the new target,
so the shot is modified by only +2 for the WU having
changed facing.
NOTE: Vehicles which end up in a hex occupied by
enemy units with AT weapons ofsome sort, can be fired
upon at range zero during the Defensive AT Fire Phase
by those units with the AT weapons. Note that a WU
might still have to rotate in place to get a shot in if the
Vehicle did not enter the hex via its covered fire arc.
a. There is+ I penalty when rolling on the SmaiiAnns
Combat Results Table if an on map ART gun changes
facing before firing in the Defensive Small Arm Fire
Phase. NoATFAs can have been conducted previously
in the prior phase, and none may occur in this phase.
8.4 The Offensive Fire Phase
Unlike the Defensive Fire Phases, there is only one
Offensive Fire Phase per tum, where all Anti-Tank and
Small Anns Fire Attacks by the phasing player take
place. As a general rule, the phasing player may con-
duct his attacks in any sequence so long as each of his
units or weapons fire only once at enemy units during
the Offensive Fire Phase.
NOTE: Remember; on map ARTguns/offboard mod-
ules that conducted indirect fire Barrage Attacks dur-
ing the Barrage Phase may not fire during the owning
player's Offensive Fire Phase.
8.41 Rates of Fire: During the Offensive Fire Phase,
units may only conductATFAs against enemy Vehicles
{if they have such a capability). If they do have such a
capability, then during the Offensive Fire Phase, each
single AT rine, AT, AA or ART gun can each fire three
times {this renects the rate of fire these weapons were
capable of). Flamethrowers may fire only once.
a. Each FT unit with a FS value may conduct a SAFA
once as well.
NOTE: Platoon sized units carrying man-portable
WUs can conduct ATFAs during this phase and fire
again making a normal Small Arms Fire Attacks against
an enemy Soft Targets (like enemy platoons).
8.42 Changing Facing: Vehicles may not change fac-
ing during the Offensive Fire Phase, nor may each in-
dividual main gun or MG they carry be fired at more
than one target hex per phase. {Each individual main
gun or MG may choose a different target hex however).
AT, AA, and ART guns may not change facing in this
phase either, and they may only fire at one target hex
during the Offensive Fire Phase.
NOTE: Remember; neither Vehicles nor AA, AT. or
ARTguns may change facing during the Offensive Fire
Phase, even to bring their weapons to bear on enemy
targets.
8.43 Vehicle Fire Sequencing: During the phasing
player's Offensive Fire Phase, a Vehicle could fire some
weapons at Soft Targets and some at Hard Target {en-
emy Vehicles), but the same Vehicle's main gun could
not fire at both in the same tum. Vehicles which con-
duct ATFAs against enemy Vehicles after moving may
also fire at other enemy units, so long as they use their
other main guns or MGs.
8.5 Anti-Tank Fire Attacks {ATFAs)
Anti-Tank Fire Attacks are conducted against enemy
Vehicles. Both friendly Vehicles and non-vehicle units
may conduct these attacks, but only if they are armed
with a main gun or an AT weapon of some son.
NOTE: The I0-sided die supplied in the game is only
used to resolve ATFAs (like a Tank firing it 's main gun
at other Tanks) and the initial roll to determine if the
Tank suffered a Break Down. When rolling the 10-sided
die, a 0 is read as a 10.
8.51 Target Designation: Prior to conducting ATFAs,
the firing player must designate which of his units are
firing at which enemy Vehicles in the target hex. Any
number of friendly units within range could fire at the
same enemy Vehicle. If the target unit is within more
than one unit's fire arc, all other units which are able to
fire at the hex may do so.
8.52 Combining Fire: When unitsconductATFAs, they
fire individually. They may not be combined into one
total strength, thus a target Vehicle can be attacked any
number of times, but individually each time.
8.53 AT Fire Procedure: When resolving an ATFA
directed at a Vehicle, count the hexes from the firing
unit {exclusive) to the target {inclusive). To fire, roll
the ten sided die. If the number rolled {as modified fo r
any special conditions listed under the chan) is less than
or equal to the To Hit number listed on the Anti-Tank
Combat Results Table {ATCRT), the Vehicle is Hit,
considered destroyed, and removed from play.
EXCEPTION: Flamethrowers, AT rifles and MGs
have a dijfereni "To Hit " procedure and may cause
Break Downs instead (see Section 13.1).
a. It is possible to have a "zero" range attack against
Vehicles are in the firing unit's hex.
b. A roll of a " I" on the ATCRT is always a Hit, re-
gardless of the actual To Hit score that was calculated
so long as the target was Spotted and within the firing
unit's Weapons Range, LOS and fire arc {anyone can
have a lucky shot).
NOTE: While a "Bang, you're dead" approach to
AT fire is simplistic. most Vehicles of the period. in-
cluding Tanks, had minimal armor; and little redun-
dancy in their systems. Partial damage results like mo-
bility lei/Is and such are unrealistic. Once hit, most
Crews "called it a day" even if their Tank was still a
"runner ".
R-9
8.54 Multi-Shot AT Weapons: The followingATweap-
ons all have a universal rate of fire of three when con-
ductingATFAs: AA guns, AT guns, ART guns, AT rifles,
and Vehicles armed with a main gun.
8.55 ATFA Restrictions: When conducting an ATFA,
all shots must be directed at the same Vehicle until one
hits or all shots are exhausted. Players may not switch
targets midstream without first destroying the initial
target Vehicle selected. Each firing weapon conducting
the ATFA fires individually. Only after one shot hits
can a new target be selected {in a new hex if firing dur-
ing the Defensive Fire Phase). During the Offensive
Fire Phase, the three shot rate of fire applies only if
firing at enemy Vehicles within the same hex. Should
the initial target Vehicle be destroyed before using up
all the AT shots, the remainder are lost unless another
Vehicle is present within the hex.
EXCEPTION: Units armed with AT rifles may freely
select any new target Vehicle within range during any
Fire Phase after hitting the first target.
a. Trucks armed with AA, AT or ART guns may not
move and conduct AFTAs in the same tum. They may
do one or the other.
8.56 Target Acquisition: When firing at a newly des-
ignated target in a hex, {or a new target within the same
hex) the To Hit roll is modified by adding +2 per roll.
This modification applies only when acquiring a new
target the first time. If the shot misses, the second shot
at the same target is modi lied by only + I {the Crew is
acquiring the target and making necessary adjustments).
The third shot and subsequent shots at the same target
in the same hex has no die roll adjustment.
EXAMPLE: During the British player's Offensive
Fire Phase, he sees three German A7V Tanks in the
same hex. Fortunately, the British player has an ART
gun already facing towards the target hex (otherwise
he could not fire asfacing changes may occur only dur-
ing the Defensive Fire Phase). He selects the top A 7V
to conduct an ATFA against (using a +2 die roll modi-
fier as this is the first shot at a new target). The first
shot hits and destroys the tank leaving two A 7Vs. The
British player has two shots remaining and may use
them as there are two A 7Vs still in the same hex (other-
wise he could not fire if they were in a different hex).
He now targets the second A7V and fires. The To Hit
roll is again modified by +2for selecting a new target.
Assume the shot misses (perhaps hitting a nearby house
and scaring a cow). The ART gun fires a third time
(second shot at the same target). now with only a +I
modification as the target is now partially acquired.
Had another shot remained. this third shot at the same
target would have no die roll modification.
8.57 Terrain and Sb:e Modifiers: For Vehicles, the
only terrain type which has an impact are Town hexes.
When conducting anATFA against a defending Vehicle
in a Town hex, add + I to the die roll.
a. Also, when conducting ATFAs at enemy Vehicles,
add or subtract the target Vehicle's printed size modi-
fier to the final To Hit die roll. Vehicles with no size
modifier shown have a value of "O" for size modifica-
tions.
EXAMPLE: When firing at a Whippet Tank in a Town
hex three hexes away, increase the final To Hit die roll
by two, +I for being in the Town and +I for the small
size ofthe Whippet Tank. So the normal To Hit number
of7 or less at a range ofthree hexes requires a roll of5
or less in this case.
8.58 AT Gun Close In Bonus: When AT guns {not AT
rines or AA or ART guns) conducts an ATFA and the
range is 5 hexes or less, the roll is modi tied by - I per
shot fired.
-------1Landships!
NOTE: Historically, AT guns were very effective out
to 500 yards.
8.59 ART Guns vs. Armored Cars and Trucks: Low
velocity ART guns were simply not designed to engage
small, fast moving targets. When conducting an ATFA
at an AC or Truck with an ART gun, add +2 to each
roll, in addition to any size and terrain modifiers, plus
any other modifiers that apply. As with all Vehicles, if
an ATFA hit is achieved on theATCRT, theAC or Truck
is destroyed.
8.6 Small Arms Fire Attacks (SAFAs)
Small Arms Fire Attacks are generally conducted
against enemy Soft Targets. Both Vehicle and non-ve-
hicle units may conduct these attacks.
8.61 Target Designation: Prior to conducting SAFAs,
the firing player must designate which of his units are
firing at which enemy units in the target hex. Any num-
ber of friendly units within range could fire at the same
hex.
8.62 Combining Fire: All FS values directed at any
Soft Targets in a hex must be combined, forming a single
FS total, including any direct fire by on map ART guns.
(Thus, a Soft Target may only be attacked once). Any
number of units can fire into a hex, simply total up all
FS values into one sum.
EXCEPTION: Flamethrowers always attack sepa-
rately (see Section 13.2).
a.lfthe target unit is within more than one Vehicle's
fire arc, all other Vehicles which are able to fire at the
hex may do so.
8.63 SAFA Procedure: After adding all FS values di-
rected against the hex into one total, find the correspond-
ing column on the Small Arms Combat Results Table
(SACRT} and roll one six-sided die, making any modi-
fications for terrain and/or weapons. If a "Hit" is ob-
tained, each Soft Target in the hex is considered Hit.
Make a separate Morale Check roll for each Soft Tar-
get unit in the hex that was Hit. As a result of the Hit on
the SACRT, Soft Target units will either be Pinned or
Eliminated (see Module 9).
a. When Vehicles fire at Soft Targets, it is handled
similarly. Each Vehicle's main gun 75mm and above
has a universal FS of I 0, main guns below 75mm have
a universal FS of 8. Each MG on a Vehicle has a uni-
versal FS of2.
EXAMPLE: One British Mk. IV male Tank and a 4-
6-5 infantry platoon conduct a SAFA into a hex con-
taining rwo German infantry platoons. One ofthe Mk.
IV's 47mm main guns and MGs can fire so the Tank's
total FS is I 0 (8+ 2). The infantry platoon's FS total is
4. As all attacking units are conducting a SAFA, they
must combine their FS values. So both are added to-
gether totaling 14 (I 0 + 4). The die is rolled and cross
referenced with the column containing the 14 entry on
the SA CRT. Assume a "Hit " is scored. Each defending
platoon must make a separate Morale Check.
8.64 Terrain Effects: The terrain the defending unit(s)
occupies will modify the attacker's die roll for SAFAs
as follows:
Unit in a Town, or Strongpoint hex: +2
Unit is in a Trench or Wood hex: +I
Unit is in a River hex: -I
Unit in any other type of terrain: No Effect
EXCEPTION: Mounted CT units and Vehicles may
not claim Trench or Strongpoint CRT benefits for oc-
cupying such a hex. They must use the other terrain in
a hex as their modifier (if any).
a. Units firing out of Wire hexes have the FS value
halved (round down).
b. Units in River hexes may not conduct SA FA's at
all.
8.65 MG Fire Bonuses: Machine guns are horror sto-
ries. To reflect this, for every MG platoon or every two
(round down) Vehicle MGs conducting a SAFA into a
hex, subtract -I from the SACRT die roll per each MG
platoon or two Vehicle MGs firing. Also, units under-
going Morale Checks caused by this level of MG fire
must modify their roll by adding +I. This modifier to
the Morale Check roll is NOT per Vehicle MG or MG
platoon firing but a one time penalty caused by the pres-
ence of MG fire, whether from two or more Vehicle
MGs or a single MG platoon.
8.66 SAFAs and Cavalry: Unlike the movies, mounted
CT units may not conduct SAFAs during the Offensive
Fire Phase. They may only do so only when in dis-
mounted mode.

OVERALL EXAMPLE OF COMBAT.· The diagram shows how a British assault on some German units might occur. Not all choices are indicated. Both British tanks
are Mk. IV (males).
During the Vehicle Movement Phase, both British Tanks move to the positions indicated. During the Defensive Anti-Tank Fire Phase, if German unit A is armed
with an AT rifle, it can fire up to three times at Tank# I. Otherwise there isn 't much the German player can do. During the British Player 's Ist Foot Troop Movement
Phase, he moves his MG platoons one hex as shown.
During the Defensive Small Arms Fire Phase. German infantry pla-
toons A and B conduct a SAFA at British MG platoon #3 using their
combined FS value of9 (4+5). Tank #2 blocks infantry platoon C's
LOS to MG platoon #3. The German player locates the correct col- (
umn on the SA CRT with this value and resolves the attack. Assume it
mzsses.
During the Offensive Fire Phase, the British player has a number ~
ofchoices. Tank #/fires at German unit A. It has a total FS ofBusing
the 57mm main gun on it 's left side. MG platoon #3 also fires at A
with a FS of 2. Tank #2 also fires the 57mm gun on its left side at A
with a FS ofB. This SAFA is resolved on the 18 column (8+2+8) on
the SACRTwith a -Ito the die rollfor the sole MG platoon firing. The
British player then resolves this SAFA. If German unit A is Hit, it must
add +I to its Morale Check die roll for presence of MG fire. If Ger-
man unit A had been a Tank, British Tank #I would have had up to
three ATFA shots at range Ito hit it, as would have British Tank #2,
but at a range of 4 hexes. In this case the ATFA either hits or misses,
and the To Hit number may be modified by the number ofshots each
takes.
Tank #I can also fire its left side MG (FS of 2) at German unit B.
and can be joined by British MG platoons #4 and #5 each using their
FS of 2. Tank #2 also fires at B. using its Forward firing MG for 2
more points. Total FSin this SA FA isS (2+2+2+2) with a -3to the die
roll for rwo MG platoons and two Vehicle MGsfiring. Combat is then
resolved on the correct column ofthe SA CRT. If German unit B is Hit,
it must add+ I (only) to its Morale Check die roll for presence ofMG
fire.
Tank #2 also allacks German unit C with its the 57mm main gun
and MG on its right side. Total FS in this SAFA is 10 (8+2) with no
modifier to the die roll as there is only one Vehicle MG firing. Combo I
is then resolved on the correct column ofthe SA CRT. Ifunit Cis Hit, it
does not add+ Ito its Morale Check die roll as only one Vehicle MG
is firing. Note that British MG platoon #5 could have fired at C in- MG SAFA Fire
stead ofBas could MG platoon #3. However; MG platoon #4 could
not have fired at C since MG platoon #5 was in the LOS of MG pla- SAFA Fire
toon #4 and thus blocked it. lf#5 had been cu"ently Pinned, #4 could •••••••
then have fired at C.

R - 10
-------1Landships!-------
a. When conducting a Defensive SAFA against
mounted cr unit(s) subtract -I from the SACRT die
roll (so ifa MG platoon conducts a Defensive SAFA at
mounted cr units, subtract -2). Otherwise no other die
roll modifiers apply. Cavalry never receives terrain die
roll modifiers during a SAFA except for being in a
Town, Woods or River hex.
b. If a Hit occurs, the cr unit undergoes the normal
Morale Check procedure resulting from the Hit. If not
Eliminated, roll the die a second time for each cr unit
in the hex. On a roll of a "I", enough horses of the cr
unit are killed to effectively "dismount" the unit. Re-
place that cr unit with the equivalent infantry or MG
platoon (in Pinned status of course).
8.67 SAFAsAgalnstVehlcles: Tanks are generally im-
mune to SAFAs conducted by units. Certain early model
Tanks are vulnerable to SAFAs by MG platoons only
and these are marked with an"!" indicator in the lower
left hand comer. See Rule 13.14 for more details.
a. All ACs are considered Hard Targets and are gen-
erally immune to SAFAs. However, ACs can suffer
wheel damage from rifle and MG fire. To simulate this,
all ACs are subject to the possibility ofdamaged wheels
whenever any type of enemy unit conducts a SAFA
against them. lfthe SAFA scores a Hit, a second roll is
required. Roll a six sided die, if the result is a I, theAC
has suffered a damaged wheel in some fashion. The
AC must stop in its present location. Place a Break
Down marker (TEMP version) on it. Otherwise, SAFAs
have no effect. Damaged wheels can be fixed by the
AC's Crew. To do so, on the player's following tum,
place a Crew counter on top of the AC during the Ist
Foot Troop Movement Phase to indicate the wheel is
(hopefully) being fixed. This Crew unit may not con-
duct SAFAs itself or be Pinned by enemy fire while
repairing the wheel. The Crew of course may be fired
at Aller a one tum wait, the wheel is automatically
fixed. The Crew unit is removed from play on the
player's following l st Foot Troop Movement Phase and
is again assumed to be inside theAC. The AC may move
again next tum in the player's Vehicle Movement Phase.
Should the AC suffer another wheel hit, it is assumed
to have suffered a permanent Break Down in the last
hex entered.
b. All Trucks, unlikeACs, are vulnerable to any type
ofSAFA (by platoons or Vehicles}. If a Hit is achieved
on the SACRT, place a Crew marker on the Truck. The
Crew must undergo a Morale Check. lfthe Crew passes
the check and becomes Pinned, the Truck must stay in
the last hex entered and remain there. The Crew and
Truck are considered Pinned and treated as such until
the Crew recovers, after which the Crew marker is re-
moved and the Truck may move normally. If the Crew
fails the check and is thus Eliminated, so is the Truck.
8.68 SAFAs a nd Trucks: Trucks with mounted WUs
or MGs may not both move and conduct SAFA fire in
the same tum They may do one or the other. Move-
ment has no effect on any other Vehicle attempting a
SAFA.
8.7 Mixed Target Types
In a mixed stack ofVehicles and Soft Targets, ATFAs
against Vehicles have no impact whatsoever on the Soli
Target units. Unless stated in the scenario, SAFAs
against Tanks have no effect, and only affect Soli Tar-
gets, Trucks, and possibly ACs.
EXAMPLE ONE: During the Offensive Fire Phase
two Mk. IV (male) Tanks and a 4-9-5 MG platoon en-
gage a hex containing two German infantry platoons
and an A7V Tank. One of the Mk. JV's conducts three
ATFA 'sat the A7V. all missing. All other units conduct
a SAFA against the infantry platoons. Both the second
Mk. JV's 57mm main gun and MG canfire so the Tank's
total FS is 10 (8+2). The MG platoon's FS total is 4.
Bolh are added together for a total of 14 with a -1 to
the die roll for the one MG platoon firing. Assume a
Hit is scored. Both German infantry platoons have to
take individual Morale Checks with a +Ito the die roll
because of the MG platoon firing. Assume both Ger-
man infantry platoons become Pinned. The A 7V is un-
touched.
EXAMPLE TWO: During the Vehicle Movement
Phase the British player moves two Mk. IV Tanks into a
hex containing two friendly infantry platoons. During
the Defensive AT Fire Phase, a German ATgun perched
on a hilltop blasts away. One Tanlc "bites it" and is
removedfrom play. The infantry platoons are untouched
by the ATFAs. During his 1st Foot Troop Movement
Phase, the British player moves a MG platoon into the
hex (which already has a Tank and two infantry pla-
toons in it). Assume the German player has jive 3-9-4
MG platoons within range ofthis British stack. During
the Defensive Small Arms Fire Phase they conduct a
combined SAFA with a FS of 15 and a -5 to the die roll
(-I for each MG platoon firing) and rake the hex caus-
ing a Hit (it was hard to miss). All three British pla-
toons must make separate Morale Checks with a +I
(only) to the die roll for the presence of MG fire. As-
sume one infantry platoon is Eliminated, and one is
Pinned along with the MG platoon. The remaining Mk.
IV Tank is also unharmed, hearing only "pinging" on
its hull.
9.0 APPLYING SACRT RESULTS
While combat results on the ATCRT take the form
of misses (no effect) or Hits (Vehicle is destroyed and
removed from play). SAFA attacks using the SACRT
usually take the form of achieving a "Hit" against the
enemy units. When Hit, a unit must undergo a Morale
Check with different outcomes possible as detailed
below.
9.1 Morale Checks
Units required to undergo Morale Checks as there-
sult ofbeing"Hit" by Small Arms Fire Attacks can suf-
fer Pins, a Retreat, or be Eliminated.
NOTE: Always use a six-sided die when resolving
Morale Check rolls.
9.11 Procedure: To make a Morale Check, roll a six
sided die for each unit in question. The following re-
sults apply:
I) If the roll is less than or equal to the printed Mo-
rale Rating on the counter, the unit suffers a Pin result.
Ioven the unit. Ifan already Pinned unit suffers a sec-
ond Pin result, the unit must Retreat two hexes, and
remain Pinned. Keep the unit invened.
2) If the die roll is greater than the unit's Morale
Rating, it is Eliminated (whether it is already Pinned or
not) and removed from play.
9.12 Morale Rating Modifiers: ln general, nothing
will change a unit's printed Morale Rating. An excep-
tion to this are Wire hexes and Gas Attacks. Soft Target
units which end their Movement Phase in a Wire hex
have their printed MRs reduced to "3" until the unit
moves out of the Wire hex. Units caught in the three
hex radius of a Gas Barrage have their MRs lowered
by I if Hit and forced to take another Morale Check
(see Rule 5.56).
9.2 Pins
A unit is inverted to designate a Pinned ~
~ ·
result. A Pinned unit cannot move (unless Gil>~<'!
already Pinned and forced to Retreat) or ~ Q'
conduct SAFAs. Pinned units can suffer additional Pin
results with no additional effects beyond Retreating (see
Rule 9.11 above). A unit stays Pinned until the player's
proper Pin Removal Phase, when it then automatically
becomes unpinned again.
R - 11
9.3 Retreats
When a unit is called to Retreat, whether it is two or
more hexes, the retreating unit must Retreat in the gen-
eral direction of their rearward lines. Retreats may not
be "forward" unless as a last reson. Should a unit be
surrounded by enemy FT or cr units, the retreating
unit is Eliminated instead. If any hexes surrounding the
hex contains only Vehicles, Crew counters (with or
without WUs), FOs orTLs the unit may Retreat through
that hex with no adverse effect (it may also end its Re-
treat in such a hex).
9.4 Advance After Combat
Unlike many other games, in Landships! there are
no advances by friendly units into vacated enemy hexes.
10.0 THE PIN REMOVAL PHASES
To remove Pinned status from a unit, simply nip the
counter to it's unpinned side during the phasing or non-
phasing player's proper phase in the Sequence of Play.
Pinned status can be removed automatically during the
proper phase. Neither terrain, a unit's position, nor the
presence of enemy units has any impact on removing a
unit's Pinned status. Only the presence of a Gas marker
will force a unit to remain Pinned.
11.0 THE AIR PHASE
During the joint Air Phase, both players will have
the opportunity to use their Aircraft to influence the
action on the ground below.
11.1 Mission Procedure
Prior to the stan of the game, each player must de-
cide what kind of Air Mission his CS and B type Air-
craft will perform and assign it a counter with the cor-
responding mission printed on it (place it underneath
the Aircraft). Mission types are limited by the
countermix. F types may only engage in air to air com-
bat and do not require a Air Mission marker. CS type
aircraft may conduct Artillery Observation, Bombing,
or Strafing missions. B types may only conduct Bomb-
ing Missions. In each case, an aircraft unit may only be
used three times in any scenario, and may not change
its mission once selected. For Aircraft on Anillery Ob-
servation missions, the three use requirement is defined
as three successful Barrage Attacks requests being
nominated, approved by the FOT, and hitting a hex (but
if they Scatter, too bad).
11.11 Bringing Aircraft Into Play: During the joint
Air Phase of the scenario, the phasing player begins by
first placing any of his available Aircraft on any hex on
the map (Aircraft can fly all over the map, just place
them in the desired hex). Once placed they may not
move. The non-phasing player may then place his F
type Aircraft (only) to intercept the phasing player's
Aircraft if he wishes. CS and B type aircraft may only
defend in air to air combat, they may not be used to
intercept. If friendly and enemy Aircraft are both in the
same hex, a dogfight may ensue before the phasing
player continues with any Air Mission.
NOTE: F types may move each Joint Air Phase. B
and CS types move only during their owner 's Air Phase.
11.12 Dogfights: In any hex containing at least two
opposing Aircraft, if one is a F type, players must con-
duct a round of air to air combat, otherwise no combat
takes place. To do so, both players fire at one another.
F type Aircraft roll on the 5-8 column of the SACRT.
CS and B types fire back on the 2-4 column. Each player
rolls one die per friendly plane. Ifa "Hit" is scored on
the SACRT, one opposing Aircraft is shot down. Only
after both players have rolled are any losses extracted.
a. When dogfighting, the SACRT die roll is modi-
fied if at least one of the F type aircraft present pos-
sesses an air to air die roll bonus modifier (the Fokker
-------1Ulndshipsi- -- -- - -
D7, Spad 13, SESa). When at least one of these are
involved in an air to air attack, it receives a - I on its
SACRT die roll.
b. If the non-phasing player's F types destroy all the
phasing player's F types, they may then continue on to
conduct one air to air attack on any of the remaining
enemy CS or B type Aircraft in the hex. If no losses
occur, those CS and B types which survive this one
round of air to air combat continue with the Aircraft's
Air Mission. If the CS or B types are destroyed, they
cannot. If the intercepting F types are destroyed, the
remaining friendly aircraft units belonging to the phas-
ing player may of course, complete their Air Missions.
Missions can be still be performed even if friendly Air-
craft fail to shoot down any enemy interceptors, so long
as one friendly CS or B type survives.
I 1.2 Anti-Aircr aft Fire
The non-phasing player (only) may attempt AA fire
at Aircraft belonging to the phasing player. Aircraft con-
ductingAnillery Observation or Bombing Missions are
not subject to enemy SAFAs by ground units. They can
only be hit by AA guns. Aircraft which conduct Strafe
Missions are subject to SAFAs by ground units as well
as being attacked by AA guns.
11.21 AA Gun Fire Procedure: AA Guns are aiiWUs
requiring a Crew. They all have a maximum Weapons
Range printed to the right of the slash when firing at
Aircraft. AA gun fire is conducted by the non-phasing
player (only) after all air to air combat but before any
other Air Missions are performed. Each AA gun may
fire at one Aircraft in this phase (even if it fired previ-
ously during the tum). When fi ring at an Aircraft each
AA gun rolls the die three times. A roll ofa " I" is a Hit.
One Hit causes the Aircraft to add +I to the die roll
when resolving any Bombing or Strafing Missions, or
prohibits Aircraft from Observing that tum. Two Hits
cause the Aircraft to immediately abort, remove it from
play (it is not considered shot down however). Three
Hits immediately destroys the Aircraft.
a. Hits are not carried over from tum to tum. An Air-
craft which receives one Hit on a tum is considered
undamaged the following tum.
I 1.22 Ground Fire Procedure: All enemy ground FT
units (not Vehicles) within Weapons Range of an Air-
craft conducting a Strafe Mission may first conduct a
free SAFA against the Aircraft as if they were attack-
ing a ground unit. Add +2 to the roll to renect the Air-
craft is moving rapidly and ignore any MG fire bonuses.
If the Aircraft is Hit, the Strafing Mission is aborted,
remove the Aircraft from play (it is not considered shot
down however).
11.3 Close Support Missions
Artillery Observation, Bombing and Strafing mis-
sions are all considered Close Support Missions. The
details of this missions are presented here.
I IJ I Artillery Observation: CS type
aircraft may conduct Artillery Observa-
tion Missions and thereby act as FOs (sec ObA
:Jon
Rule 5. 12), after surviving any dogfights
and AA fire by AA guns. Such Aircraft are able to "ob-
serve" any one hex within two hexes of the hex it occu-
pies. Place a Barrage Target marker in hex. The ob-
serving Aircraft remains in the hex chosen during play
until their side's next Barrage Phase. The Observed hex
can then be Barrage Attacked using indirect fire by any
friendly on map ART guns/otT board modules (only).
Aircraft are automatically "in communications" with
their side's artillery (do not roll the die), but still use
the FOT and check for Scatter.
11.32 Bombing Missions: CS and B type Aircraft may
conduct Bombing Missions against ground units. Place
•
the Aircraft in the target hex. After sur- AlrMI..ton
viving any dogfights and AA tire by AA
guns, Aircraft may attack the ground units.
Aircraft attack together, rolling once on
the Air to Ground Bombing Table for all Aircraft units
per target in the hex. Add multiple Bombing Factors
from ditTerent Aircraft together. To resolve the attack,
locate the column on the Air to Ground Bombing Table
containing the total Bombing Factors, roll a die for each
target in the hex and apply the result.
I)A "P" result on a Soft Target or Truck will Pin the
unit, any further hits are treated as ''No EtTect". "P"
results have no effect on Tanks or ACs.
2) If the hex has an WU in it and a "P" result occurs,
roll a second time for each WU present. A second roll
of I or 2 destroys that WU, otherwise no e ffect. A Crew
unit (if present) is unaffected by this second roll, but is
treated as a Soft Target above for the first "P" result.
3) An "E" result will eliminate any one target type in
the hex, including Vehicles and WUs.
EXAMPLE: The phasing player places two B type
Aircraft units (each with a Bombing Factor of6) to con-
duct a Bombing Mission in a Clear terrain hex occu-
pied by an enemy infantry platoon and a Tank. The non-
phasing player intercepts, placing a F type Aircraft in
the hex. A dogfight begins with the phasing player roll-
ing a die twice, both missing. The non-phasing player
rolls once for his F type Aircraft and hits. The phasing
player loses one B type Aircrajl. The phasing player
now may perform his Bombing Mission against the hex
but with only 6 Bombing Factors. Against the infantry
platoon he rolls a "5" which fails to hit. Against/he
Tank he rolls a "/ " which is a "P" result but since
Tanks ignore Pins the a/lack is ineffective anyway. If
only he had had a heavier bomber with 12 Bombing
Factors! Then with this lucky roll the Tank would have
been destroyed.
a. Terrain modifiers listed underneath the Air to
Ground Bombing Chart apply to attacks against Soft
Targets and WUs, not against Vehicles.
I 1.33 Strafin g Mission: In any scenario Al~~tpon
taking place in 1917 or later, CS typeAir-
craft may conduct Strafing Missions. /h\\,
Place the Aircraft in the target hex. If the Straf ing
Aircraft is not hit by AA guns or by a SAFA from ground
units, the Aircraft unit Strafes the target hex. A Strafe
attack is resolved just as if a ground unit was conduct-
ing a SAFA against the hex. Add all the Strafing Values
for all the Aircraft present in the hex together. Find the
column containing this total on the SACRT and roll a
die. Even though Aircraft are assumed to be are firing
MGs while strafing, they do not get the MG fire die
roll modifier or cause targets to sutTer a Morale Check
penalty when Hit. If a Hit is scored, go through the
regular Morale Check procedure to determining the ef-
fect.
NOTE: The Aircraft are moving too fast to put down
the kind of sustained fire the MG fire bonuses repre-
sent.
12.0 CLOSE ASSAULT PHASE
In this phase, the phasing player's FT and CT units
may advance one hex into an enemy occupied hex to
engage in Close Assault Combat. Opposing units al-
ready present in the same hex must engage in Close
Assault Combat This is the most dangerous type of
attack in the game. Close Assault Combat is a spiraling
vortex that will suck both player's units into it.
12.1 General Rule
Friendly units which are in or move into enemy held
hexes during the Close Assault Phase are "locked" into
combat until all of one side's units are eliminated or
forced to retreat. During this phase in future turns, units
which enter the hex cannot leave and the hex stacking
R - 12
limits are ignored. All other phases of the sequence are
ignored in regards to those units in CloseAssault Com-
bat until one side or the other is eliminated. However,
Vehicles are always !Tee to exit a hex after a round of
Close Assault Combat, only FT and CT units are
"locked" into it. Units in Close Assault Combat use the
Close Assault Combat Results Table (CACRT) during
the Close Assault Phase. Remember, combat is manda-
tory.
12.11 Bonus Move: After surviving any Defensive
SAFAs, any FT or CT unit which is adjacent to an en-
emy occupied hex at the start ofthe Close Assault Phase
may enter the hex during the Close Assault Phase. This
is a free move, but units not planning to engage in Close
Assault Combat this phase may not move. Tanks and
ACs (but not Trucks) may have also moved into the
enemy occupied hex during the Vehicle Movement
Phase. In either ease, only during the Close Assault
Phase does combat resolution occur.
12.12 Who is Affected: Only FT and CT units are af-
fected by Close Assault. FT and CT units may not ini-
tiate a Close Assault against a Tank or AC (for simplic-
ity) but Tanks may initiate Close Assault Combat against
enemy FT or CT units with or without a friendly FT or
CT unit present in the hex (a different procedure is used
however). FT and CT units may Close Assault Trucks.
Tanks and ACs may not Close Assault other enemy Ve-
hicles, and both side's Vehicles may coexist peacefully
in the same hex.
12.2 Close Assault Procedures
The exact procedure used to resolve a Close Assault
depends on the presence ofVehicles (or their absence)
on both sides. Use the rules below.
12.21 No Vehicles Present: If no Vehicles are present,
then both players total up the number of platoons on
their side that are in the same hex, then subtract the
defender's total fi'om attacker's total. If the defender
has more units than the attacker, then he has the posi-
tive differential and rolls on the table. Note that unit FS
values play no part in determining success or fai lure in
Close Assault Combat, only raw numbers. Find the col-
umn containing the differential on the Close Assault
Combat Results Table (CACRT) and roll the die. Ap-
ply any other die roll modifiers/column shifts listed.
The result will state the number of platoon sized units
lost by both sides (if any). TLs, FOs, and Crews cannot
be used to satisfy losses.
a. If the hex contains no friendly FT or CT platoons,
and only TLs, Crews or FO's are present, they are all
Eliminated. If any WUs remain in the hex after all the
friendly FT or CT platoons are Eliminated, they are
lost as well.
b. If a side's losses exceed the number of units it has
remaining, the excess is ignored. If after combat, the
hex still has both friendly and enemy units remaining,
they remain "locked" in place until the next Close As-
sault Phase (which will happen in the opposing player's
tum).
12.22 Vehicles Present: When both friendly FT or CT
platoons and Tanks or ACs Close Assault a hex, use the
same procedure above to determine the ditTerential, but
each Tank and AC "counts" as a friendly platoon. Ap-
ply any other die roll modi tiers/column shifts listed.
Losses however, are never taken from Tanks, which are
exempt, and ACs are always the last units on a side to
be lost. Vehicles are always free to exit a hex under
Close Assault, only FT and CT units are "locked" into
it.
EXA MPLE: The German player Close Assaults a
hex containing a British MG platoon and a Tank with
fo ur of his own inf antry platoons. Except for counting
the Tank as a platoon, it is ignored. The net difference
- ------1Landships! - -- - - - -
scENARios
BEFORE YOU BEGIN: Foot Troop units are listed in each scenario by their Fire Strength (FS), Weapons Range (WR), and Morale
Ratings (MR). A "4-6-5 infantry platoon" is one with a FS of 4, a WR of 6, and a MR of 5.
When reinforcements are called for, it may be specified that they may be taken only from units previously lost or from Vehicles that
have suffered permanent Break Downs (pick them up off the map). If the correct unit type is not yet available, those reinforcements
may enter only they do become available. Otherwise, reinforcements may be taken from unused units or from previously lost units.
If the scenario indicates that the cavalry units enter in Charge Speed, all cavalry units must begin that turn Charging. On the
following turn, the player selects the movement rate per each group of three units, moves them and then selects the movement rate for
the next three units and so on as per Rule 6.35.
Aircraft present in the scenarios are representative of those types in service at the time, and are not necessarily historically correct.
17.1 Scenario: "Churchill's Toys"
Shortly after the war broke out, Winston Churchill assembled a force of eight
Rolls-Royce armored cars, commanded by Lt. Commander Sampson. Due to inter-
nal resistance, Churchill attached them to the Royal Navy Air Service under the
premise that they would be used to rescue downed pilots. His real agenda was to use
them as a mobile fighting force. Churchill sent the cars along with a marine brigade
to Dunkirk on Sept. 26th, 1914, after which, they moved to the Lens sector. The
armored cars were on a reconnaissance mission between Motbeque and Cassell along
with the French 63rd Chasseur Regiment, when they encountered elements of the
German 9th Cavalry Division also probing for information.
Map Set Up: Use Maps 6 and 8
Game Length: 7 Turns
Germans (1st Player):
No units on map at start.
German Reinforcements:
On Tum I: Six cavalry platoons and three cavalry MG platoons enter in or adja-
cent to hex 481 7, six cavalry platoons enter in or adjacent to hex 4009, all on Map 8.
All units are in mounted mode and may enter at either speed.
Allies (2nd Player):
Place six 2-6-4 infantry platoons in or adjacent to hex 5427 on Map 6.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon each in hexes 4829 and 5629 on Map 6.
Place three 4-6-5 infantry platoons each in or adjacent to hexes 5025, 6225 and
5721 on Map 6.
Allied Reinfo rcements:
On Tum 2: Eight Rolls-Royce armored cars enter anywhere along the east edge
ofMap 6.
Special Rules: Ignore the printed minefields on Map 8. Treat them as clear terrain.
Victory Conditions: By the end of the game, the German player must occupy or be
the last to occupy hexes 5427 and 6124 on Map 6, and eliminate at least six of the
Allied 4-6-5 infantry platoons, and exit eight or more cavalry platoons ofT the west
edge of Map 6 between hexes 6018-6618. The Allied player wins by stopping the
German player from winning.
Aftermath : Each armored car contained one .30 caliber machine gun, weighed four
tons, and had a speed of 45 mph. The cars had 9mm armor and their wheels were
practically bullet proof. The battle literally shocked the German horse soldiers as
their slugs bounced off the armored car's metal. The clash witnessed the cavalrymen
withdrawing. Never again would the Germans try to use massed cavalry formations
on the Western Front. On the Allied side, little more was done to use the cars in
combat. Churchill promoted their mobility and combat capability to deaf ears. By
1915, they were only used for very minor actions since the trench lines had set in.
Most of the armored cars were then shipped off to the Middle East. There they
proved their worth in the wide open trenchless battlefields.
German LK II (MG version)
s-1
17.2 Scenario: "The Scent of Spring"
The Germans were to the first to use deadly gasses in an attempt to create breaks
in the stalemate. One such case occurred at the Ypres salient in Belgium on the late
afternoon of April 22nd, 1915. The defenders were crack French Algerian troops,
ready for any type of conventional shot and steel, but totally unprepared for the
insidious menace about to be unleashed.
D
Maps Set Up: Use Map 3 N
Game Length : 13 turns A
Germans (1st Player) set up second:
Twelve 4-6-5 infantry platoons and four 4-9-5 MG platoons are placed no more
than one unit per hex anywhere in the first row of trench hexes between 1633 through
1618.
Five ART guns with Crews are placed anywhere on hex row II xx.
Place four 3-6-4 infantry platoons in or adjacent to hex 1325.
Place three FOs anywhere along the ffont line of trench hexes.
German Reinforcements:
None.
Allies (2nd Player) set up first:
Thirteen 4-6-5 infantry platoons, no more than one per hex, are placed in first
trench hexrow from hexes 1933 to 1917. Also place five 4-9-5 MG platoons any-
where in this trench line.
Place three ART guns with Crews in any of the wood hexes behind the Allied
trench line.
Place one 3-9-4 MG platoon and one FO each in hexes 2628 and 2724.
Allied Reinforcements:
On Tum 2: Twelve infantry platoons (with any values, Allied player's choice); six
of them enter at hex 3433, three enter at hex 25 17, and three enter at hex 2533.
Special Rules: On Tum I the German player must conduct Gas Attacks during the
his Barrage Phase from at least three of his artillery guns. For each Allied unit in the
Gas Attack zone, a single die is rolled. On a roll of 1-2, the unit is automatically
Pinned and treated as per the standard Gas rules. On any other roll the unit is elimi-
nated (most units did not have gas masks). German units are immune to Gas effects.
The German must also fire a second Gas Attack trom at least three of his artillery
guns on his Barrage Phase following whenever the Tum 2 Allied reinforcements are
first Spotted or Observed.
No other Gas Attacks are permitted and neither side's artillery may fire
Smokescreens. HE and Shrapnel may be fired.
All hexes between the two front line enemy trenches are also considered mined.
For each hex a German unit enters, roll a die: a 1-2 and unit is Pinned, a 6 and the
unit is eliminated. On any other roll nothing happens. Once the German reaches the
Allied ffont trench line, no further hexes are considered mined.
Victory Conditions: The Germans win by exiting at least I0 infantry/MG platoons
off the map at hexes 3433 or 4025 by the end of the game, otherwise the Allies win.
Aftermath: This scenario compresses events of the six day battle. The chlorine gas.
(which was actually released trom giant cylinders) created a four mile gap in the
ffont which the German troops promptly exploited. Many Algerian troops fled to the
rear, falling to their feet and choking to death in front of the rear area commanders.
The hole in the lines lasted only a short while. Reinforcements from the Ist Cana-
dian Division, stationed on the right flank of the Algerians, counterattacked. The
following day, the Germans hit the Canadians with a dose of gas, for which they too
had no protection. Chaos set in and the Canadians withdrew. The British Second
Army commander, Smith-Oorien, was sacked for recommending a partial withdrawal
ffom the Ypres salient, only for the army to be given a new commander who did
exactly the same thing. Historically, the Allies were unable to halt the advance until
additional forces arrived. Overall, the Allies lost 60,000 men, many due to the gas.
For them it was a hopeless situation ffom the start. Embarrassingly for the Germans,
while the attack was a success, all their strategic reserves had been sent east to crush
the Russians and the attack eventually petered out.
-------1Landships!- - - - - --
17.3 Scenario: "Flamethrowers are at Hooge!"
An ominous silence in the still of the night pervaded the Hooge sector nearYpres-
Menin during the night of July 29-30th, 1915. Unknown to the defending British
(Companies A and C of the 8th BattJ41 st Brigade/14th Division), the first large
scale attack using the new flamethrower was about to occur. As an artillery barrage
dropped on the enemy trenches, the Gennan I26th Infantry Regiment (from the
53rd Reserve Division!XXXII Corps) anned with six flamethrowers simullaneously
launched jet after jet of liquid fire, stunning the surprised defenders.
Map Set Up: Use Map I.
Game Length: 12 Turns.
Germans (1st Player) set up second :
Elements of the Gennan I26th Regiment:
Place nine4-6-5 infantry platoons, three 4-9-5 MG platoons units anywhere among
the following hexes: 3604, 3605f, 3606f, 3607f, 3608f, 3609f, 3610f, 3611, 3612,
3613,3614 and 3615.
One FO is placed in hex 3607.
The Gennan player has a total of four modules of off board artillery available
throughout the game, starting on Turn I. The Gennan player may not make Gas
Attacks, but may use Smokescreens, HE and Shrapnel.
Hexes marked "F' must also have one Flamethrower placed in them.
German Reinforcements:
On Tum 4: One 4-6-5 infantry, one 4-9-5 MG and one 3-9-3 MG platoons enter at
hexes 4005 and 4009. Three 3-6-4 infantry and one 3-9-4 MG platoon enter at hexes
3602 and 371 1.
On Tum 8: Three 3-6-3 infantry and two 3-9-3 MG platoons enter at 4009. One
Fokker El (F) and one Halberstadt CL II (CS) become available.
British (2nd Player) sets up first:
Elements of the British 8th Battalion:
Co. A: Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon each in hexes 3502, 3503, 3504 and
3505. Place one 3-9-4 MG platoon in hex 3506. \ None
Co. B: Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon each in hexes 3512, 3413, 3414 and
3415. Placeone4-9-5 MG platoon in 3516.
Co. C: Place one 2-6-4 infantry platoon each in hexes 3508, 3509 and 3510. Place
One 2-9-4 MG platoon in 3511.
Battalion Reserves: Place one FO, one 5-6-5 infantry, and one 5-9-5 MG platoon
in hex 2908.
Place Wire markers in hexes 3513,3514 and 3515.
British Reinforcements:
On Tum 3: Three 4-6-5 infantry platoons and one 4-9-5 MG platoon enter at hex
2402. Also staning Tum 3, the British player receives a total of three off board
artillery modules for the remainder of the game.
On Tum 4: Two Salmson 2 (CS) aircraft become available
On Tum 7: Three 3-6-3 infantry and one 3-9-5 MG platoon plus one FO enter at
hexes 1602, or 2002. Three 4-6-5 infantry and one 4-9-5 MG platoon enter at hexes
1617 or 2217.
Special Rules: During the first two turns only the Gennan player may act. The
Sequence of Play is modified as follows:
I) Ist Player's Barrage Phase
2) Ist Player's Close Assault Phase (including free Close Assault Phase bonus
move).
3) 1st Player's Offensive Fire Phase
4) Ist Player's Foot Troop Movement Phase (only one)
5) Ist Player's Pin Removal Phase
Starting Tum 3, the normal full Sequence of Play is used.
On Tum I (only) any trench hexes occupied by British units may be targeted and
automatically Hit by the German off board artillery. No Communications, FOT or
Scatter rolls are required. The Gennan player only needs to roll for the results of the
Hit, and no terrain modifiers may be claimed by the British player.
Also on Tum I only, any Close Assault Combat initiated by the Gennan player
gets a -I modifier to the die roll (in addition to any others like MG platoons or
Flamethrowers present).
The river (actually a canal) is fordable and can be crossed by FT units using Rule
7.II a.. Also treat the road stretching from hex 2802 through Chambley to hex 2817
as a trench in this scenario.
Victory Conditions: The Gennan player must solely occupy (or be the last to do so)
hex 1609 by the end of the game for a major victory. A minor victory is solely
occupying all the town hexes ofChambley (Hooge) by the end of the game. Other-
wise the British win.
Aft ermath : The only eyewitness, Lt. Carey of Company A, described the attack:
"There was a sudden hissing sound, a bright crimson glare turning red. The attack
lasted about a minute but it was stupefying and Company A was decimated due to
s -2
the shock." The overwhelmed 8th Battalion reeled backwards and moved onto Zouave
Wood some two miles south. The Gennans exploited the hole and advanced one
mile south of Hooge taking the high ground for the time being. The British attempted
an uncoordinated counterattack with a collection of some newly arrived troops that
had little effect. Flamethrowers seemed to worlc, but proved difficult to resupply.
17.4 Scenario: "Gor ringe's Flotilla"
Success in the early days of the Mesopotamian Campaign was owed to rapid
movement. This was due to the fact the British used steamers and gunboats to move
up the Tigris and Euphrates Rivers. On July 24, 1915 Gorringe and his 12th Indian
Division was ordered to seize Nasiriya (pop. I0,000) located on the Euphrates.
Ma p Set Up: Use Maps I, 2 and 7 z;
7
1
Game Length: 14 Turns ~z
British (1st Player):
No unit.s on the map at stan. One DH 4 (CS) is available Turn I.
British Reinforceme nts:
On Tum I: Elements of the 12th Indian Division consisting of nine 4-6-5 infantry
and three 4-9-5 MG platoons enter aboard three steamers, along with two gunboats
(Mantis and Firefly) on the east edge of Map I on the river.
1\Jrks (2nd Player)
Elements of the Turkish 35th Division:
Map I: One ART gun with a Crew in hex 1609
Map 2: Three 3-6-4 infantry and any one MG platoon in Frontenac, plus one ART
gun with a Crew in hex 4928.
Map 7: Four 3-6-3 and three 3-6-4 infantry platoons, plus two 3-9-3 MG platoons
anywhere in Tramelan, plus one ART gun with a Crew in hex 2106.
1\Jrkish Reinforcements:
Special Rules: Ignore all trenches and bridges printed on Map I. The bridge and
road on Map 2 do not exist. The river is too wide for units to cross by themselves
without boats.
Steamers and gunboats move once per tum during the Vehicle Movement Phase
with their Movement Allowances of 7 and I0 respectively. Ships may only move
along the river (costs I MP per hex) and act like Vehicles moving along a road, they
do expend MPs to change facing to follow the river. Ships never suffer Break Downs.
Steamers and gunboats have built in Crews that never make Morale Checks. Gun-
boats are treated as mobile ART guns and fire in the same manner as described in
Section 5.7 of the rules and, if engaging in direct fire, never Scatter. Gunboats use
the BCRT for indirect fire, and the SACRT for direct fire when resolving combat,
and nottheATCRT. Each 6" gun has a FS of20 and each 3" has an FS of 10. These
have a direct fire WR of 10, or infinite range if firing indirectly. If the 6" and 3" guns
fire at the same target hex, total their FS values. Like tanks, gunboats may fire at
different targets. Each gunboat may conduct an extra SAFA with a MG FS of I0 and
a WR of9 as well, with a -2 to the die for the MG bonus. Guns and MG fire may not
be combined. Different target hexes must be selected. Use the SACRT to resolve the
fire. Targets must first be Spotted by a gunboat to use direct fire or Observed by an
Aircraft for indirect fire.
Each steamer may carry up to four platoons. Unpinned platoons may embark on
steamers from any hex during the 2nd FT Movement Phase by being adjacent at the
stan of the Vehicle Movement Phase. The steamer may move the following tum.
Troops may debark into any hex from steamers during either Foot Troop Movement
Phase. Platoons aboard steamers may conduct SAFAs as per the nonnal rules gov-
erning SAFAs.
SAFAs themselves have no effect on the boats or their passengers, only direct fire
by artillery guns can force them to turn back or destroy them. Artillery guns firing at
ships use the ATCRT table as if firing at a Vehicle. Subtract one from the To Hit die
roll due to their size. Ifa steamer or gunboat is Hit, roll another six-sided die.
For steamers, a second roll of 1-4 disables the steamer. Any platoons being car-
ried are placed in an adjacent shore hex. On a roll of 5-6, the steamer is sunk and any
platoons on it are landed at an adjacent shore hex in Pinned status for the tum.
Steamers that are destroyed return the following game turn at the river edge on the
east side of map I.
For gunboats, a second roll of a I sinks it, a 2-3 halts its movement pennanently
with no effect on its guns, a 4-5 means all future rolls on the BCRT or SACRT are
modified by adding+ I (no limit), a 6 means the gunboat must move back off the east
mapedge at full speed for the rest of the scenario (still may fire however). Gunboats
that are destroyed are pennanently destroyed.
Neither side may use Gas or Smokescreens.
-------1Landships!-------
Victory Conditions: The British win by solely occupying all the hexes of Frontenac
on Map 2 and Tramelan on Map 7. The Turks win by destroying at least one gunboat
and having a unit remaining in either town. Any other result is a draw.
Aftermath: Gorringe's men did not see much of the Turks. Moving in convoy fash-
ion up the river near Nasiriya a few artillery guns opened up, luckily missing the
flotilla. Troops debarked and took a few villages south of Nasiriya and then
reembarked and moved to Nasiriya where they unloaded again and fought their way
into the town itself. The Turks resisted and then fled. They lost 500 men, the British
300. Many men crumpled from exhaustion in the cool, 113 degree heat. Meanwhile
Townsend, the commander of the Indian 6th Division had his own flotilla and had
already moved to Kut-<:1-Arnara, another 72 miles north, the site of a future British
military disaster.
17.5 Scenario: "A New Excaliber"
While July, 1916 actually saw the first tanks arrive in France they entertained the
troops more than anything else. It was their use two months later that proved them to
be a weapon to be reckoned with. On September 15th, 191 6 during the Somme
Offensive, the 50 Mk. I tanks of Companies C and D, Heavy Branch, Machine Gun
Corps, along with British, Canadian and New Zealander troops were ordered to
advance up the Albert-Bapaume road, breach the lines, and capture the towns of
Flers and Courcelette.
D
N
Map Set Up: Use Map I.
Game Length: 9 turns.
A machine gun fire. The German First Army ordered all reserves into the breach and
British (1st Player) set up second:
Elements of the 14th and 4 1st Divisions:
Place one FO in hex 3307.
Place two 4-6-5 infantry platoons each in hexes 33 14, 3312 and 3307
Place three 4-9-5 MG platoons in hexes 3308 or 3313.
Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon each in hexes 3404 and 3405.
Place one 3-9-4 MG platoon in flex 3405.
One Vickers Gunbus (F) and one Salmson 2 (CS) are available at start.
The British player has a total of three off board artillery modules for the game,
available at start.
British Reinforcements:
On Tum I: Three Mk. I male tanks enter at hex 3317 and one Mk. I female tank
with TL 2nd Lt. Storey enters at hex 4009.
On Tum 5: Two 3-6-3 infantry and two 3-9-3 MG platoons enter along the west
map edge on either road.
Germans (2nd Player) set up first:
Elements of the German 21st Division:
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon each in hexes 2314, 2414, 2411 and 2908.
Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon each in hexes 2809, 2807, 3005 and 2808.
Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon in 3007.
Place one ART gun with a Crew each in hexes 2210, 2 108, 2110 and 20 I0.
One FO is placed in hex 2908.
Place Wire counters in hexrow 31 xx, one per hex.
The German player also has a total of three off board artillery modules through-
out the game, available from the start.
German Reinforcements:
On Tum 4: Four 3-6-4 infantry platoons appear along the north map edge east of
hex 2817, and four 4-6-5 infantry platoons with two Flamethrowers enter the south
map edge east of hex 310 I. The German player also receives two Fokker E I (F)
aircraft.
On Tum 6: Three 3-6-3 infantry and one 3-6-3 MG platoon may enter east of hex
30 17 on the north map edge.
Special Rules: No Smoke or Gas Attacks may be used by either side. There are no
Tank Break Down checks after movement in this scenario. Note however, that all
British tanks are vulnerable to MG fire, and may Break Down because of that.
Treat the roads running from hex 2802 through Chambley to hex 2817, and from
hex 1602 to 1804 as trenches in this scenario. The river is fordable by FT units using
Rule7.lla.
German FT units are susceptible to Tank Fright in this scenario. Tanks that pass
through, or end their move in with, or adjacent to, any German infantry or MG
platoon force them to undergo Morale Checks during the Tank Fright Segment (only).
Each such unit must make a Morale Check (roll a six sided die). Add +I to the die
roll for each tank that passed through, or is in with or adjacent to the unit. Units
suffer the following results:
I) If the unit is not already Pinned, and rolls less than the unit's Morale Rating, it
becomes Pinned (only). Invert the unit.
2) If the unit is already Pinned, and rolls less than the unit's Morale Rating, then
Retreat the unit two hexes. It remains Pinned.
s-3
3) Regardless if the unit is already Pinned or not, if the roll 1s equal to or exceeds
the unit's Morale Rating, it must Retreat three hexes and then becomes Pinned, if
not already.
EXAMPLE: 'TWo British tanks end their move adjacent to a unpinned German
infantry platoon with a MR of4. During the Tank Fright Segment, the German player
must make a Morale Check for the unit, adding +2 to the die roll for the two tanks
present. Assume he rolls a 3, which becomes a 5. Case 3 above applies. The unit
must Retreat 3 hexes and becomes Pinned. The British player promptly machine
guns the unit during the Offensive Fire Phase.
Victory Conditions: To win, the British player must take and solely occupy all the
town hexes of Chambley for at least 3 consecutive turns without any German units
occupying a town hex during that interval. If the British player takes the town hexes
but cannot meet the 3 tum requirement, its a draw. If the British player fails to take
all the town hexes during the scenario, the Germans win.
Aftermath : The offensive began at 5:30 and by 7:00am., the 14th, 41 st and New
Zealand divisions ofHome's XV Corps were breaching the German lines near Flers.
Of the 50 Mk. I tanks employed, 32 were able to start their engines. Of these, 9
immediately broke down and 17 never arrived at the jump off line. A section of
Company D (four Mk. I tanks) stumbled through the breach while Lt. Hastie took
his tank into Flers blazing, guns and all. Historically, the breach was marginal at best
and most of the exploitation troops were bogged down from the withering German
switched all artillery fire into the sector. About 80 men defended Flers while the
Germans moved in some fi ve divisions. Both the breach and Flers were eventually
lost.
Eleven days later another tank commander, 2nd Lt. Storey, heroically took on the
Germans single-handedly in front of Gueudecourt in his Mk. I female tank. Storey
received the Tank Corps first medal for valor (a DSO) in capturing 1,500 yards of
trench and 370 prisoners. This scenario is a composite of both actions.
17.6 Scenario: "The Battle of Rafa"
Following the battle at Rumani the British pushed toward EIArish and captured it
on Dec. 21st, 1916. The Royal Navy brought supplies on Dec 23rd to sustain the
offensive. To the east, at Rafa, lay the last of all Turkish soldiers in Egypt. It was
their last stand in this area. On January 8th, 191 7 the British attacked.
D
Map Set Up : Use Map 8
Game Length : I 0 Turns.
British (1st Player):
No units on map at start. The British player has a total of four off board artillery
modules throughout the game, available at start and his choice of any one aircraft.
British Rei nforcements:
On Tum I: Two Rolls-Royce, one Austin, and two Ford armored cars (Armored
Car Bn. No.7) along with any nine cavalry platoons in mounted mode (5th Mounted
Bde.) enter on the south map edge at either speed.
On Tum 4: Any three cavalry platoons in mounted mode at either speed, four 4-9-
5 MG platoons, and three FOs enter along the east and/or west map edges, north of
row 61xx.
Turks (2nd Player):
Elements of the Turkish 31st Regiment must all set up anywhere in the trench and
town hexes within the surrounding mine belt printed on Map 8:
Six 4-6-5 infantry platoons
Four 4-9-5 MG platoons
Three 3-6-4 infantry platoons
Four ART guns with Crews
Three FOs.
Six Wire markers may be placed anywhere south of the mine belt.
Turklsh Reinforcements:
On Tum 2: Six 3-6-3 infantry and two 3-9-3 MG platoons enter anywhere along-
the north map edge.
Special Rules: All printed minefield hexes are considered active. For each mined
hex a British unit enters, roll a die. On a 1-2 the unit is Pinned (armored cars suffer
wheel damage), a 6 and the unit (including armored cars) is eliminated. On any
other roll nothing happens. Once the British player penetrates the printed mine belt,
no further hexes inside it are considered mined.
All Trench and Town hexes are considered Automatically Observed (see Rule
5.13b) by the British Player from the start.
Victory Conditions: To win, the British player must eliminate all Turkish units and
solely occupy the town of AI Rami by the end of the scenario. The Turkish player
must have at least three platoons or crews left in the town at game end to win. Any
other result is a draw.
-------j[andships!-------
Aftermath: The British advanced across barren terrain- some 2,000 yards. No head-
way was made against the well dug-in forces. These consisted of some two battal-
ions of the Turkish 31st Regiment plus a battery of arti llery guns under a German,
Col. Kressenstein. When the Turks received reinforcements, the British High Com-
mand sent orders to Gen. Chetwode (commanding the British forces) to withdraw.
U.nk.nown to Chetwode, his cavalry and an.nored cars had already charged, destroy-
ing the last of the enemy forces.
17.7 Scenario: "The Baptism of French Armor"
On April 16th, 1917, some 126 French Schneider ta.nk.s were deployed in the
French 5th An.ny sector to conduct an operation in the Chemin des Dames area. A
total of tank eight groupes were meant to tak.e part, yet three never arrived due to
German artillery fire, and the other five only arrived after the infantry units had
advanced! N
Map Set Up: Use Maps 4 and 5 A treat This, combined with a populace longing for peace, finally caused the total
5 disintegration oft he Russian An.ny. By now, it consisted mainly of Finns, Poles and
Game Length: 12 Turns.
French (1st Player) set up second :
Elements of the 5th Army:
Use all the Allied infantry and MG platoons supplied in the counten.nix except as
specified below.
Infantry platoons may only be set up in any hexes within the FALCON AND
LONDON trenchlines.
MG platoons and three FOs may be placed in any trench hex on the French side.
Two Schneider tanks each are placed in hexes 1527, 1528, 1529 and 1530.
Six St. Chamond tanks are placed among the following four hexes: 1519, 1520,
1521 and 1522.
Two Nieuport 17 (F) and one Salmson 2 (CS) are available at start.
French Reinforcements:
On Tum 4: Two St. Chamond tanks enter at hex I025 . (These must be taken from
previously lost/permanently broken down tanks).
Germans (2nd Player) set up first :
Elements of the 7th An.ny on Map 4:
Use all the Gen.nan infantry platoons supplied in the counten.nix placing them in
any hex within the two trenchlines labeled RHEIN.
Place any four MG platoons in the following hexes, one per hex: 2721 , 3030,
3024 and 2624. All remaining MG platoons in the counten.nix may set up in any
trench hexes.
Place one FO each in hexes 2720, 2128 and 2726.
Place one ART gun with a Crew each in hexes 2725 and 3031.
Place one 88mm AA gun with a Crew anywhere behind German lines.
Two Albatross Dill (F) are available at start.
German Reinforcements:
On Tum 4: Four MG platoons ofany strength (must be from previously lost units),
enter at any hex along the north or south map edges, east ofhexrow 19xx on Map 4,
but at least two hexes from enemy units.
On Tum 5: Three 4-6-5 infantry platoons (from previously lost units), each with
one AT rifle, enter at hex 7009 on the east edge of Map 5.
On Tum 6: Any six infantry and three MG platoons (from previously lost units)
enter anywhere along the nonh and south edges, east ofhexrow 19xx on Map 4, but
at least two hexes from enemy units.
NOTE: If the units are not available when called for. the reinforcements may
enter anytime afterward when availability permits.
Special Rules: Each side has a total of I0 modules of off board artillery throughout
the scenario, available at stan. Neither side may mak.e Gas Attacks. The French may
use Smokescreens on Tum I only.
Note that all French ta.nk.s are poor trench crossers, i.e. roll on the Breakdown
Chan for each enemy trench hex entered.
All French tanks are assumed to be carrying extra fuel tanks strapped to the out-
side. When any SAFA by a MG platoon, or any type ATFA, is directed against the
tank., regardless of success, roll a final six-sided die. The fuel ignites on a roll of" I"
and the tank. is eliminated. Otherwise, no effect.
The German Albatross D Ills have an air to air modifier of -I in this scenario.
Vict6ry Conditions: The French player must solely occupy all the town hexes of St.
Angelique on Map 4 and Beaumont on Map 5 by the end of the scenario. Otherwise
the German player wins.
Aftermath: Despite the stiff resistance of the Gen.nan 7th An.ny, the French pressed
their attack capturing Ft. Malmaison and most of the Chemin des Dames. However,
these objectives fell short of what was expected which eventually caused a wide-
spread mutiny amongst the French troops. (The mutiny eventually amounted to some
23,385 men of which 55 were shot. Nivelle, Commander-in-Chief of the French
Army, was dumped for Petain). Overall casualties amounted to 130,000 men, whi le
the Germans lost 163,000. As for the tanks, most fell prey to mechanical problems
s-4
and/or were unable to cross the trenches. However, those which escaped proved
their wonh as artillery support behind the advancing infantry. On May 5th, another
attack using a company of St. Chamond and two companies of Schneiders attacked
in the adjacent 6th An.ny sector striking for Laffaux Hill and .nearby towns. The
tanks advanced but were plagued by breakdowns. After these attacks, the French
seemed to lose interest. The offensive ended May 9th.
17.8 Scenario: "The Kere.nsky Offensive"
After the March Revolution and the forced abdication of the Czar, Nicholas II,
Alexander Kerensk.y became the Prime Minister. At the urging of the Allies, he tried
to mount an offensive against the Germans. The Russian an.nies advanced some 30
miles. At first the Germans merely watched, and did little apart from dispatching the
revolutionary Vladimir Lenin, to Russia. Finally, after allowing the Russian advance
go unchallenged, the Gen.nans fell on the Russian troops causing a disorderly re-
B
Siberians as everyone else was rallying around Lenin. The Allies, who had pressed
for this last offensive, now felt guilty at the mess and in July 1917, committed some
of their an.nored cars near Buczacz.
Map Set Up: Use Maps 5 and 6
G•m•L'"~''
N
A
JOT"m' :
Germans (1st Player):
No units on map at start The German player also receives a total of three off
board artillery modules throughout the game. One Gotha V (B), one Junkers I (CS)
and one Albatross D Ill (F) aircraft are available at start.
German Reinforcements:
On Tum I: Eighteen 4-6-5 infantry platoons and six 4-9-5 MG platoons enter on
Map 6 on road hex 4025 and/or between hexes 5218-5517.
Russians (2nd Player):
The Russian player sets up first on Map 6:
Place one 3-9-3 MG platoon each in hexes 472 1 and 4628.
Place one 3-9-4 MG platoon each in hexes 5025 and 4628
Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon each in hexes 4623, 4524 and 4526.
Place one 3-6-3 infantry platoon each in hexes 4820, 5023, 4925, 4726, 4226 and
5225.
Place one 2-6-4 infantry platoon each in hexes 4522, 4631 and 5023.
Place one FO and one ART gun with a Crew each in hexes 5427 and 6025.
Russian Reinforcements:
On Tum 4: Two Rolls-Royce, two Ford and two Austin armored cars, plus one
truck mounted 3" AA gun enter on Map 5 at hex 7009. Two Vickers Gunbus (F)
aircraft become •vailable.
Special Rules: The Albatross D Ill has an air to air modifier of - I in this scenario.
Victory Conditions: The Russian player must exit at least eight infantry/MG pla-
toons off the east map edge by the end of the game to win, otherwise the German
player does so.
Aftermath: The Gen.nans occupied a lot of eastern Russia (fueling their appetites
for a repeat perfon.nance 24 years later). Kerensk.y himself was tossed out of office
on Nov. 7th,.1917. 1n the following six years, millions would die for someone named
uLenin".
17.9 Scenario: "The Turks Stand at Ramadi"
During March 1917, the British forces in Mesopotamia (now Iraq) had seized
Baghdad on the II th, and from that point onward, the Turk.ish 6th An.ny was in
reverse motion. On the 14th, the Mesopotamian Expenditonary Force, smashed the
Turkish rearguard at Mushahida, 20 miles north of Baghdad. On the 16th, theTurk.s
tried to make a stand at Baquba which was another 15 miles north. After a lull in the
advance, in July the British, now overly confident, sent 2500 men, 600 of them now
motorized with trucks, along with four armored cars plus airplanes to seize Ramadi,
west of Baghdad on the Euphrates River.
Map Set Up: Use Maps 2, 6, 7 and 8
L 9 8
Game Length: 8 turns N
Turks (2nd Player): 2 A
Turkish Rearguard:
Six 3-6-3 infantry and two 3-9-3 MG platoons anywhere on Map 8.
Seven 2-6-3 infantry platoons on the road on Map 6.
- - - - - - -1Landships! - - -- - - -
Turkish Garrison at Ramadi:
Twelve 4-Q-5 infantry and any four MG platoons, plus six ART guns with Crews
anywhere on Maps 7 and/or 2.
The Turks have two Fokker El (F), one Albatros C Ill (B) and one Halberstadt
CL II (CS) aircraft available at start.
Reinforcements: None
British MEF (1st Player):
No units on the map at start Two DH 4 (CS) and two DH 5 (CS) aircraft are
available at start.
Reinforcements:
On Turn I: One Rolls Royce, two Austin, and one Ford armored car, and any nine
cavalry platoons enter (at Trot speed) along the east edge of Map 8.
On Turn I: Two Seabrooke Trucks and two each of the truck-mounted 3" and 13
pdr. AA guns plus nine 4-6-5 infantry and five 4-9-5 MG platoons enter along the
east edge of Map 2. Each truc'k may carry I platoon or the platoons may enter on
foot.
Special Rules: All trucks may unload a platoon simply by dropping it offduring the
Vehicle Movement Phase and continue moving. The same truck cannot pick up a
platoon that same turn. To pick up a platoon, it must begin the Vehicle Movement
Phase in the hex of the unit to be picked up. It may then move to the destination hex
(same phase) to unload.
The Seabrooke truck mounts a light ART gun with a FS of 8 and a WR of I0. It
may fire anywhere in its fire arc except to the front (see the Vehicle arc diagrams)
and ignores the +2 penalty for changing fire arcs. It may not conduct indirect fire
Barrage Attacks.
Ignore the printed road on Map 2. It does not exist. The river may be crossed by
FT units using Rule 7.II a.
Victory Conditions: The British win decisively by solely occupying all the town
hexes of Frontenac on Map 2 and Tramel an on Map 7 by the end of the game. A
British marginal win is solely occupying either town on either map. The Turks win
by maintaining control of both towns.
Aftermath: The British were repelled, exhausted in the II 0 degree heat. The Turks
had finally made a stand this time. The British would not attempt to seize Ramadi
again until mid September, the later attack would succeed as the plan was not rushed.
For the Turks, repelling the British was like the good old days at Gallipoli in 1915.
17.10 Scenario: "The Third Battle of Gaza"
In the Middle East, the British faced tough opposition from the Turks and Ger-
mans. Persevering however, by the Third Battle of Gaza (Oct. 31, 1917), the Turks
were placed in a critical situation as their morale began to drop with their continuous
defeats. At Telas Saba, the British charged the dug in Turkish Army with their ANZAC
Desert Mounted Corps under General Chavial and succeeded in taking Beersheba.
The British then attacked Tel Sheria with both the 60th and 74th Divisions, which
included eight Mk. IV tanks and air support.
~------~~------~
l~-------~L..~-------'1
Map Set Up: Use AN
Game Length: I0 Maps
Turns6 and 8 . . .
British (ht Player) set up second:
Place one ART gun with a Crew each in hexes 4909, 5504, and 5205 on Map 8.
Two aircraft (British player's choice) are available at start.
British Reinforcements:
On Turn I: Six 3-6-4 infantry and three 3-9-4 MG platoons and one FO (elements
of the 60th Division) enter between hexes 4133-4433 on the south edge of Map 6.
On Turn I: Six 3-6-3 infantry and three 4-9-5 MG platoons and one FO (ele-
ments of the 74th Division) enter between hexes 4117-4418 on the north edge of
Map6.
On Turn 3: Any twelve cavalry platoons in mounted mode enter the north edge of
Map 8 between hexes 4602-4901 at Charge speed. Also one Mk IV male tank enters
at hex 4617 on Map 8 and seven Mk IV female tanks enter between hexes 6417-
6717 on the south edge of Map 8.
Turks (2nd Player) set up first:
Elements of the Turkish 8th Army set up on Map 8. All units set up in trenches or
in the town hexes of AI Rami. Units must be placed from north (hex 6303) to south
(5915) within the minebelt. Turkish forces consist of:
Three 3-6-4 infantry platoons
Three 2-6-4 infantry platoons
Three 3-6-3 infantry platoons
Three 4-9-5 MG platoons
Three ART guns with Crews and two FOs.
Special Rules: The printed minefield hexes only effect British units which enter the
hex. When they do so, roll a six-sided die per each unit. For FT and CT units a roll of
I or 2 means the unit is Pinned. A roll of 5 or 6 eliminates the unit. For tanks, a roll
s-s
of 1-2 causes a Break Down (roll again to see how severe). The mines are always
active and are never used up.
Victory Conditions: To win, the British must destroy all Turkish units and solely
occupy all the town hexes of AI Rami on Map 8 by the end of the game. The Turk
can win by exiting at least 6 infantry/MG platoons off the road at hex 4617 on Map
8 by the end of the game, starting Turn 4. It's a draw if the British take the town but
the Turks exit the map, or the British fail to destroy all the Turkish units.
Aftermath: While an overall British success, the Turkish forces counterattacked
and then withdrew to avoid encirclement at Tel Sheria.
17.11 Scenario: "The Approach to Flesquieres"
During the famous Cambrai offensive of November, 1917, the first large scale use
of tanks (some 216) occurred. Initial success was overwhelming 'and by I0.00 am.,
the tankers had reached their initial objectives. They continued on with their blitz-
krieg towards Flesquieres with the 51st Highland Division right behind them. The
town itself was a ruin, but was directly in the center of the advance. This battle area
was in the German 54th Division's sphere of responsibility and the German garrison
at Flesquieres was deployed under an able officer named Major Krebs. The garrison
had three infantry battalions, two MG companies and five artillery batteries plus the
support of another nine batteries to the rear. Manning one such gun of the 8th Bat-
tery was one Unteroffizier Kruger to whom the British Tank Battalions D and E had
the unfortunate pleasure to meet...
N
Map Set Up: Use Maps 3 and 5
Game Length: 15 Turns. 5 A
British (1st Player) set up second:
Elements of Tank Battalions D and E set on Map 3:
Three Mk. IV (male) tanks each are placed in hexes 1730, 1728, 1624, 1619 and
1722.
Elements of the 51st Highland Division set up second on Map 3:
Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon each in hexes 1724, 1825 and 1632. Place two 4-
6-5 infantry platoons each in hexes 1622, 1631 , 1721 and 1729.
Place two 4-9-5 MG platoons in hex 1829.
Place two 4-6-5 infantry platoons in hex 1828.
Place one 3-6-4 and one 4-6-5 infantry platoon each in hexes 1825, 1926 and
1827.
Place one 3-6-4 infantry and one 4-9-5 MG platoon in hex 1925.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon each in hexes 1623, 1622 and 1720.
Place one FO each in hexes 1926 and 1721 .
One Handley Page (B) and one Bristol F2B (CS) aircraft are available at start.
The British player has ten offboard artillery modules (of which six may only fire
Smokescreen barrages), available each tum from the start.
British Reinforcements:
On Tum 10: Six Mk. IV (male) tanks (must be taken from previously lost or
permanently Broken Down units) may enter at hex 4802 on Map 5.
Germa ns (2nd Player) set up first:
Elements of the 54th Division on Map 3:
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon in hex 1930.
Place one 2-9-3 MG platoon each in hexes 2031 and 2121.
Place one 3-9-3 MG platoon each in hexes 2227 and 2824.
Place one 2-9-4 MG platoon in hex 2229.
Place two 4-6-5 infantry platoons and a FO in hex 2724•.
Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon each in hexes 2030, 2031•, 2029•, 2028• , 2628f,
2624 f and 2728.
Place one 3-6-3 infantry platoon each in hexes 2127, 2229, 2130, 2230, 2325 and
2324.
Place one 2-6-4 infantry platoon each in hexes 1918 and 1919.
Place one 2-6-3 infantry platoon each in hexes 2219, 2319, 2222 and 2626.
Place one FO in hex 2330.
Place one Wire marker each in hexes: 1818, 1819, 1820, 1920, 1921, 1922, 1923,
2024, 2025, 2026, 2027, 1927, 1928, 1929, 1830, 1831, 1832, 1833, 2124, 2125,
2126, 2225 and 2226.
• indicates one AT rifle is placed in the hex also.
f indicates a Flamethrower is placed in the hex also.
The Krebs Garrison on Map 5:
Place three 4-9-5 and one 3-9-4 MG platoons plus one FO in any hex in the town
of Beaumont on the hill.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon in hex 5714.
Place one ART gun with a Crew each in hexes 6206,5812,5713,5808 and 5806.
Place one AT gun with a Crew each in hexes 6106, 4510 and 4613.
German Reinforcements:
On Tum 2: A total of four off board artillery modules become available for the
rest of the game.
_j
--------1Ulndships!--------
FIRE ARC DIAGRAMS

LKII Tank (Cannon Version)

Weapons: 2xMG, 1x37mm Main Gun
Austin Armored Car NOTE: May only fire one weapon at
Weapons: 2xMG
any time.

1xMG (2pts) 1xMG {2pts)

E!!i.

~4 ~ ...
CJ
~
)(
£4
~~
?- ~
a p~
~
(II
}~

Medium D Tank 1xM~ts) All Armored Cars (except Austin AC)

Weapons: 3xMG Note: The turret
revolves in any direction. The pattern
shows the relationship of the 3 MGs to
each other.
1xMG (2pts)
Whippet Tank
weapons: 4xMG Renault FT17
Note: only 2 MGs may fire at any MG Model: 1xMG (2pts)
one time. Cannon Model: 1x37mm Cannon (Spts)
BSF: 1x75mm short Howitzer (10pts)
Italian FT17 (Fiat 3000): 2xMG(4pts)
LKII Tank (MG Version): 1xMG {2pts)

1x75mm Main Gu
(10pts)

...
)(
3:
\I III IJ!IIIIIIlJIIIIA_..-.! IIi !JI IIIII lJ IIIV C)
CJ
~
)(

x3pdr.
Main Gun
(Spts)
1xMG (2pts)
Seabrooke Truck
C har 2c Tank Weapon: 1x3pdr Main Gun
Schneider Tan
Weapons: 3xMG, 1x75mm Long Gun Weapons: 2xMG, 1x75mm Main Gun

s-6
 1Iandships!
FAST n'ART RULES AND SCENARIO
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The Landships! Fast Start Rules are de-
signed to get you into the game very quickly.
The Fast Start Scenario is a simulation de-
picting Erwin Rommel ( oflater WWII fame)
leading his company in a classic infantry at-
tack circa 1915. As such, only the infantry
rules, along with some abbreviated artillery
rules are used.
1.11 Game Scale: Infantry and MG counters
represent platoon sized units. Each hex is
around I00 meters and each turn is about five
minutes in length.
2.0 GAME COMPONENTS
All you need to start playing are these Fast
Start Rules, some counters from the die cut
sheets, Map Section 4, and the charts and
tables card.
2.1 The Map
Only Map Section 4 is used in the Fast Start
Scenario. It represent the various types ofter-
rain found at the Argonne (in France). The
scenario set up shows how to orient the map.
A hex grid has been superimposed on top of
the map to regulate the position of units for
movement and combat purposes.
NOTE: Halfhexesformed by the grid along
the map edges are fully playable and treated
as complete hexes in every way. In addition,
"Clear " terrain hexes include those with any
number of shellholes, or solitary trees or
buildings. In short, Clear terrain hexes are
all those not specifically labeled some other
terrain type. Town hexes consist ofonly those
hexes containing buildings that have a proper
name printed near them, i.e. "Martel" on
Map3.
Printed on each map is the map number used
for referencing the scenario set ups and a Bar-
rage Attack Scatter Diagram showing where
off target artillery fire lands.
2.2 The Playing Pieces
All the die-cut playing pieces (or "units")
listed in this section are primarily composed
of men and/or horses and thus are considered
"Soft targets". French units have a blue back-
ground. German units are printed on grey.
Units are printed with various drawings and
numbers. In general, a unit's values do not
change during the game, except temporarily.
Units listed here can be affected by any Small
Arms Fire Attacks directed against them. All
units listed here capable of firing may do so
in any direction at any time. Facing rules do
not apply to them.
2.21 Foot Troops (Ffs): Foot Troops con-
sist of infantry and MG platoon sized units.
The different drawings used on the counters
have no effect on play. All Foot Troop units
have four numbers printed on their counter.
The numbers as explained as follows :
Front Back
Infantry Platoon
MG Platoon
a. The number printed in the upper left is
the FT unit's Fire Strength (FS) or basic at-
tack value.
b. The number printed in the upper right is
the FT unit's Weapon Range (WR) in hexes,
counted from the firing unit (exclusive) to the
target hex (inclusive). Infantry platoons all
have a range of six hexes. MG platoons all
have a range of nine hexes.
c. The encircled number printed in the lower
left is the FT unit's Morale Rating (MR) and
can be thought of as its basic defense strength.
d. The number printed in the lower right is
it's Movement Allowance (MA), always a
value of I. Note that FT units can move twice
per turn using this allowance, once in each
Foot Troop Movement Phase.
3.0 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS BEFORE
YOU BEGIN
Before plunging into these Fast Start Rules,
certain concepts are presented here first.
Please read them and get familiar with them.
3.1 Stacking
Stacking refers to the total number of units
which may be in a hex after movement. Units
are not restricted by the stacking limits while
moving.
3.11 General Rule: All units count towards
a hex's stacking limit. Pinned units do count
towards the stacking limit.
F -1
3.12 Stacking Limits: Units may move indi-
vidually or in stacks. Up to eight friendly pla-
toon sized units may end their Movement
Phase stacked in the same hex.
NOTE: Large stacks ofunits make wonder-
ful targets and are extremely vulnerable to
enemy fire attacks.
3.13 Close Assault Stacking: An exception
to the stacking rules is when entering an en-
emy occupied hex during the Close Assault
Phase, stacking limits for both sides are
waived and thus unlimited. That is, either
player can toss in as many platoon sized units
as they possess into Close Assault Combat.
3.14 Stacking and Retreats: Should stack-
ing limits be violated after a retreat, displace
the retreating units any number of extra hexes
until the stacking limits are met.
3.2 Zones of Control
Unlike many other wargames, in Landships!
there are no Zone of Control rules. Due to
the tactical nature ofthe game, units will natu-
rally exert their own delaying and "no go"
spheres of influence.
3.3 Supply Rules
Again, unlike many other wargames, there
are no supply rules. Due to the short period
of time portrayed in a typical scenario, units
are considered to always be "in supply." A
Scenario's special rules may list some form
of ammo limitation however.
4.0 THE SEQUENCE OF PLAY
The Fast Start game is a two-player game
where both players may move and fire. The
game itself is played in game turns. Each
game turn has many phases that follow each
other in a strict Sequence of Play. Each game
scenario identifies a First player and a Sec-
ond player. The First player remains the First
player throughout the game. The First player
follows the Sequence of Play first and is
termed the "phasing player". Some phases.
making up the turn are conducted by the Sec-
ond player (termed the "non-phasing player").
After the First player completes his run
through the Sequence of Play, the Second
player becomes the phasing player and repeats
the sequence. The First player now becomes
the "non-phasing player." After which, a new
turn ensues.
Players may skip over phases, if not appli-
cable, but the Sequence of Play itself cannot
be deviated from.
-------1Landships!-------
4.1 First Player's Barrage Phase
a. The First player resolves any Barrage At-
tacks he is eligible to conduct. These are listed
in the Fast Start Scenario set up.
4.2 First Player's lst Foot Troop Movement
Phase
a. All non-pinned Foot Troop units (infan-
try and MG platoons) belonging to the First
player may move.
4.3 Second Player's Defensive Small Arms
Fire Phase
a. The Second player's units may fire at en-
emy units using Small Arms Fire Attacks
(only).
4.4 Second Player's Pin Removal Phase
a. Any Pinned units belonging to the Sec-
ond player recover to normal status.
4.5 Joint Close Assault Combat Phase
a. This phase is only conducted when en-
emy and friendly units both occupy the same
hex, or when the First player's units adjacent
to enemy occupied hexes declare they will
initiate Close Assault Combat and move into
them (free move) during this phase.
b. Resolve any Close Assault Combats.
4.6 First Player's Offensive Fire Phase
a. All units belong to the First player's which
did not engage in Close Assault Combat this
tum may conduct Small Arms Fire Attacks.
4.7 First Player's 2nd Foot Troop Move-
ment Phase
a. All non-pinned Foot Troops belong to the
First player may move again except those that
engaged in Close Assault Combat.
4.8 First Player's Pin Removal Phase
a. Any Pinned units belonging to the First
player recover from Pinned to normal status.
4.9 Second Player Turn
The Second player becomes the phasing
player and repeats Sections 4.1 through 4.8
reversing the roles of First and Second player.
At the conclusion of this, one Game Tum is
completed and play reverts back to the origi-
nal First Player.
5.0 THE BARRAGE PHASE
During the phasing player's Barrage Phase,
he is permitted to make Barrage Attacks. The
rules for Barrage Attacks are heavily ab-
stracted in the Fast Start Scenario.
5.11 Procedure: To simulate the artillery as-
sets both sides possessed, the German player
is allowed to make three Barrage Attacks on
Tum One and one each tum after. The French
player receives one Barrage Attack each tum
starting Tum Two. These Barrage Attacks may
be directed at any hex within 10 hexes of a
friendly unit that has a Line of Sight (see Rule
7 .23) to the target hex. No more than one Bar-
rage Attack per hex is permitted. Each Bar-
rage Attack is simulated by rolling one six-
sided die. Roll once for all units in the target7.0 FIRE ATTACKS
hex. A I is a miss, a 2 through 4 is a auto- Combat is a term used when either side con-
matic Pin (flip any units over), and a 5 or 6 isducts Fire Attacks against enemy units which
an elimination (remove unit from play). If a can be seen and are w1thin Weapons Range.
player's units are in any other type of terrain All Fire Attacks in the Fast Start Rules are
other than Clear, subtract I from the roll. Small Arms Fire Attacks (SAFAs) directed
6.0 THE FOOT TROOP MOVEMENT against at soft targets like infantry platoons
PHASES (again regardless of the source). To conduct
All Foot Troop units move during the phas- a Small Arms Fire Attack, a unit must be able
ing player's two Foot Troop Movement to Spot the target hex, then determine that a
Phases. No enemy units may move at this Line of Sight exists between the attacker and
time. the target, and finally, make sure that the tar-
6.1 General Rule get hex is w1thin Weapons Range of the at-
Movement is a general term whereby play- tacker.
ers physically displace their units hex-by-hex 7.1 Facing and Fire Arcs
over the map surface. During the phasing All units in the Fast Start Game have a 360
player's tum, he may move his FT units dur- degree ability to fire into any hex w1thin range
ing both of the appropriate phases. FT units and need not be concerned with facing.
have MP Allowances of only I MP. The dis- 7.2 Spotting and Lines of Sight (LOS)
tance that may be moved depends on the unit The range at which a unit can Spot its tar-
moving, whether it is moving over cross coun- get and the Line of Sight (LOS) between the
try, along Roads or along contiguous Trench two determines whether a unit can be at-
hexes. Otherwise, terrain has no effect on FT tacked.
unit movement. 7.21 Spotting Ranges: To conduct a Small
NOTE: Remember, FTunits may move twice Arms Fire Attack, the firing unit must be
per turn overall, but only IMP per Foot Troop within Spotting range of the target (see the
Movement Phase. Spotting Table). Spotting range is counted
6.11 Terrain Costs: FT units move with I from the hex the attacker occupies (exclusive)
MP per Movement Phase. As all non-road and to the target hex (inclusive).
non-trench hexes cost I MP to enter, in prac- 7.22 Automatic Spotting: An enemy unit
tical terms FT units will mostly move only which fires during either Defensive Fire Phase
one hex per phase. However, if theFT unit is is automatically Spotted, by friendly units
moving across a continuous path of Road or within I 0 hexes of it, even if normally out of
Trench hexes, it does so at the rate of 1/2 MP Spotting range unless there is no Line of Sight
per hex and thus can move two hexes per to it. Such an unit can be fired upon by the
phase. So to move two hexes, FT units must phasing player's units during his Offensive
begin and end movement on a Road or Trench Fire Phase, unless the LOS path to the unit is
hex. FT units may carry man portable WUs blocked or the target is out ofWeapons Range.
(AT rifles, Flamethrowers, etc.), with no ef- Likewise, a friendly unit which fires during
feet on their movement ability. the Offensive Fire Phase is automatically
6 •12 Enemy Occupied Hexes: Friendly FT Spotted by all enemy units within I 0 hexes
units may not enter enemy occupied hexes of it during the following player tum, even if
except during the Close Assault Phase. When normally out of Spotting range, unless the
friendly and enemy units start the tum jointly LOS path to the unit is blocked.
occupying the same hex, each side's units are 7.23 Lines of Sight (LOS): The LOS is de-
"frozen in place". This means neither player's fined as a path of hexes from the firing unit
units can exit the hex until all enemy qnits to the target hex going down the center ofthe
are eliminated although additional friendly hexes. Ifthe LOS is blocked by friendly units
units could enter the hex (and be frozen also). or terrain, the target cannot be fired upon. The
FT units frozen in place must resolve Close LOS is blocked if it passes through any of
Phase until only one side remains.
6 . 13 Wire Hexes: FT units which
enter a Wire hex suffer a one half
reduction of their FS (round
f!
Assault Combat during the Close Assault the following:
Wire
l) friendly unpinned platoon sized units (the
LOS is not blocked if it passes through
friendly Pinned units or enemy units of any
sort), or;
down) and the unit's MR is immediately re- 2) Town, Hill, Wood or Strongpoint hexes.
duced to 3. Once the unit has left the Wire Only if these terrain types lie between the at-
hex, it's normal printed FS and MR return. tacker and defender is the LOS blocked, but
NOTE: Wire counters are never used up and do not count the terrain the target is in. Note
cannot be removed from play. that Wire hexes do not block the LOS, and;
F-2
 -------1L:andshipsr-------
3) For terrain on Hills, if the target is on
higher terrain level than the attacker is, the
LOS is not blocked unless a blocking Town,
Hill, Wood or Strongpoint hex is in the LOS
path and adjacent to the target hex.
EXAMPLE: Ifthe target is on higher ground
and the LOS moves through a Woods hex
which is on the same level, as the target and
adjacent to it, the LOS is blocked. This would
apply even if the situation was reversed, ie.
the target was on lower ground and the firing
unit on higher ground.
a. If the LOS is blocked by friendly units
or terrain, the target cannot be fired upon.
t 7.3 The Defensive Fire Phase
It is important to note that there a Defen-
J sive Small Arms Fire Phase during the phas-
ing player's turn. During the Defensive Small
Arms Fire Phase, the non-phasing player's
units can conduct a Small Arms Fire Attack
against Spotted units belonging to the phas-
ing player.
7.4 The Offensive Fire Phase
Like the Defensive Small Arms Fire Phase,
there is only one Offensive Fire Phase per
tum, where all Small Arms Fire Attacks by
the phasing player take place. As a general
rule, the phasing player may conduct his at-
tacks in any sequence so long as each of his
units fire only once at enemy units during the
Offensive Fire Phase.
NOTE: The off board artillery that con-
ducted indirect fire Barrage Attacks during
the Barrage Phase may not fire during the
owning player's Offensive Fire Phase.
7.5 Small Arms Fire Attacks (SAFAs)
Small Arms Fire Attacks are conducted
against enemy Soft Targets.
7.51 Target Designation: Prior to conduct-
ing SAFAs, the firing player must designate
which of his units are firing at which enemy
units in the target hex. Any number of friendly
units within range could fire at the same hex.
7.52 Combining Fire: All FS values directed
at any Soft Targets in a hex must be com-
bined, forming a single FS total. (Thus, a Soft
Target may only be attacked once). Any num-
l ber of units can fire into a hex, simply total
up all FS values into one sum.
I 7.53 SAFA Procedure: After adding all FS
values directed against the hex into one total,
find the final adjusted column on the Small
Arms Combat Results Table (SACRT) and
roll one six-sided die, making any modifica-
tions for terrain and/or weapons. If a "Hit" is
obtained, each Soft Target in the hex is con-
sidered Hit. Make a separate Morale Check
roll for each Soft Target unit in the hex that
was Hit. As a result of the Hit on the SACRT,
Soft Target units will either be Pinned or
Eliminated (see Rules Module 8.0).
7.54 Terrain Effects: The terrain the defend-
ing unit(s) occupies will modify the attacker's
die roll for SAFAs as follows:
Unit in a Town, or Strongpoint hex: +2
Unit is in a Trench or Wood hex: +I
Unit in any other type of terrain: 0 Pinned result. A Pinned unit can- ~ ~Q'
a. Units firing out of Wire hexes have their
FS value halved (round down).
7.55 MG Fire Bonuses: Machine guns are
horror stories. To reflect this, for every MG
platoon conducting a SAFA into a hex, sub-
tract -I from the SACRT die roll per each MG
platoon firing. Also, units undergoing Morale
Checks caused by any type of MG fire must
modify their roll by adding + I. This modifier
to the Morale Check roll is NOT per MG pla-
toon but a one time penalty caused by MG
fire by MG platoons.
EXAMPLE OF FIREATTACKS: During the
Defensive Fire Phase a French 3-6-3 infan-
try platoon and a French 4-9-5 MG platoon
engage a Clear terrain hex containing two
German infantry platoons. Both French pla-
toons conduct a SAFA against the German
infantry platoons. The French platoon's FS
total is 7 (3+4) so the 5-8 column on the
SA CRT is used. Assume a Hit is scored. Both
German infantry platoons have to take indi-
vidual Morale Checks with a +I to the die
roll because of the French MG platoon fir-
ing. Assume both German infantry platoons
become Pinned.
8.0 APPLYING SACRT RESULTS
Small Arms Fire Attacks using the SACRT
usually take the form of achieving a "Hit"
against the enemy units. When Hit, a unit must
undergo a Morale Check with different out-
comes possible as detailed below.
8.1 Morale Checks
Units required to undergo Morale Checks
as the result of being "Hit" by Small Arms
Fire Attacks can suffer Pins, a Retreat, or be
Eliminated.
NOTE: Always use a six-sided die when re-
solving Morale Check rolls.
8.11 Procedure: To make a Morale Check,
roll a six sided die for each unit in question.
The following results apply:
1) If the roll is less than or equal to the
printed Morale Rating on the counter, the unit
suffers a Pin result. Invert the unit. If an al-
ready Pinned unit suffers a second Pin result,
the unit must Retreat two hexes, and remain
Pinned. Keep the unit inverted.
2) If the die roll is greater than the unit's
Morale Rating, it is Eliminated (whether it is
already Pinned or not) and removed from play.
8.12 Morale Rating Modifiers: In general,
nothing will change a unit's printed Morale
Rating. An exception to this are Wire hexes.
Soft Target units which end their Movement
F-3
Phase in a Wire hex have their printed MRs
reduced to "3" until the unit moves out of the
Wire hex.
8.2 Pins ~
A unit is inverted to designate a ~~
not move (unless already Pinned
and forced to Retreat) or conduct Small Arms
Fire Attacks. Pinned units can suffer addi-
tional Pin results with no additional effects
beyond Retreating (see Rule 8.11 above). A
unit stays Pinned until the player's proper Pin
Removal Phase, when it then automatically
becomes unpinned again.
8.3 Retreats
When a unit is called to Retreat, whether it
is two or more hexes, the retreating unit must
Retreat in the general direction of their rear-
ward lines. Retreats may not be "forward"
unless as a last resort. Should a unit be sur-
rounded by enemy platoons, the retreating
unit is Eliminated instead.
8.4 Advance After Combat
Unlike many other games, in Landships!
there are no advances by friendly units into
vacated enemy hexes.
9.0 THE PIN REMOVAL PHASES
To remove Pinned status from a unit, sim-
ply flip the counter to it's unpinned side dur-
ing the phasing or non-phasing player's
proper phase in the Sequence of Play. Pinned
status can be removed automatically during
the proper phase. Neither terrain, a unit's po-
sition, nor the presence of enemy units has
an impact on removing a unit's Pinned sta-
tus.
10.0 CLOSE ASSAULT PHASE
In this phase, the phasing player's FT units
may advance one hex into an enemy occu-
pied hex to engage in Close Assault Combat.
Opposing units already present in the same
hex must engage in Close Assault Combat.
This is the most dangerous type of attack in
the game. Close Assault Combat is a spiral-
ing vortex that will suck both player's units
into it.
10.1 General Rule
Friendly units which are in or move into
enemy held hexes during the Close Assault
Phase are "locked" into combat until all of
one side's units are eliminated or forced to
retreat. During this phase in future turns, units
which enter the hex cannot leave and the hex
stacking limits are ignored. All other phases
ofthe sequence are ignored in regards to those
units in Close Assault Combat until one side
or the other is eliminated. Units in Close As-
sault Combat use the Close Assault Combat
Results Table (CACRT) during the Close As-
sault Phase. Remember, combat is mandatory.
- - - - - - - 1 U lndships ! - - - - - - - -
10.11 Bonus Move: After surviving any De- MG die roll bonus. Had the German not been Angelique with his units by the end of the
fensive SmallArms Fire Attacks, any FTunit Pinned, the 0 column would be used with a game. Any other result is a draw.
belonging to the phasing player which is ad- +1 die roll modifier. Aftermath: Rommel and his infantry com-
jacent to an enemy occupied hex at the start NOTE: All column shifts and die roll modi- pany moved out with others and immediately
of the Close Assault Phase may enter the hex fiers listed above are cumulative. These modi- came under withering French MG fire.
during the Close Assault Phase. This is a free fiers apply to either side during the Close As- Rommel and friends were forced to hit the
move, but units not planning to engage in sault Combat. dirt as the German artillery pounded the
Close Assault Combat this phase may not 11.0 LANDSHIPS! FAST START SCE- French trenches. The Germans finally man-
move. Only during the Close Assault Phase NARIO: aged to reach the second French trench line
does combat resolution occur. All right, you're ready to start. Below is the and suddenly the French began to flee, the
10.2 Close Assault Procedures Fast Start Scenario. Note that the platoons are Germans capturing a French battalion com-
Both players total up the number of platoons listed in this scenario by the Fire Strength mander in the process. Resistance began to
on their side that are in the same hex , then (FS), Weapons Range (WR), and Morale Rat- build up again as the Germans approached
subtract the defender's total from attacker's ings (MR). A "4-6-5" infantry platoon would the wooded area near the town. A stalemate
total. Ifthe defender has more units than the be one with a FS of4, a WR of6 and an MR then set in.
attacker, then he has the positive differential of5. Expanding The Game: This scenario can be
and rolls on the table. Note that unit FS val- II. I " Rommel in the Argonne" played using the Advanced Rules as well. In
ues play no part in determining success or In late June, 1915 , Company Commander this case, ignore the Special Rules above and
failure in Close Assault Combat, only raw Erwin Rommel of the 9th Co./1st Bn./ 124th use the all the Advanced Game artillery rules
numbers. Find the column containing the dif- Inf. Rgt. , as well as others, were ordered to (see Module 5.0 of the full rules). Add the
ferential on the Close Assault Combat Results break through the French lines in the following to each side's forces:
Table (CACRT) and roll the die. Apply any Labordaire-Bagatelle sector of the Argonne German:
other die roll modifiers/column shifts listed. Forest (which by this time was pretty much The German player has three off board ar-
The result will state the number of platoon just clear terrain with only tree stumps remain- tillery modules available each turn, starting
sized units lost by both sides (i f any). ing). At 0515, June 30th, the small infantry on Turn I plus one FO (representing
a. If a side's losses exceed the number of attack comprising five companies moved out Rommel). Set him up in either the London or
units it has remaining, the excess is ignored. after an intense artillery barrage. Rommel 's Falcon trench line.
If after combat, the hex still has both friendly own company jumped off into no man's land French:
and enemy units remaining, they remain at 0530. There were no heavy weapons, ve- The French have three off board artillery
"locked" in place until the next Close Assault hicles or aircraft in this engagement. This was modules available each tum, starting Turn I.
Phase (which will happen in the opposing an infantry attack, 1914 style and the queen Place one FO in the forested/hill hex and on~
player's tum). of battle was the machine gun. in the strongpoint on the hill.
10.3 Close Assault Modifiers Map Set Up: Use Map 4. ~ Special Rules: The German player may use
In the Fast Start game, both sides may claim Game Length: 12 Turns. ~ the First Tum Barrage and Automatic Obser-
a number of Close Assault modifiers when Germans (1st Player) set up second:
vation rules (5.12 and 5.13), but Scatter still
resolving the attack. These are listed below. The 9th Company: must be rolled for. Other types of target hexes
10.31 Column Shift Modifiers: If the Close Nine 4-6-5 infantry platoons and three 4-9- must be first be observed by the FO
Assault Combat occurs in a Town, shift the 5 MG platoons set up anywhere in the Lon- (Rommel), then checked for being "in com-
final column one to the left. don and Falcon trench lines. Place at least one munications", and rolled for on the FOT, plus
10.32 Die Roll Modifiers: For each attack- of the MG platoons in each strongpoint be- the usual scatter roll.
ing/defending MG platoon present in the hex, hind the Falcon trench line. Review Module The French player may not use the First
modify the die roll by - I/+ I. 5.0 for the German artillery rules. Tum Barrage or Automatic Observation (5.12
10.33 Pinned Units in CloseAssault: Pinned German Reinforcements: None and 5 .13) rules. Instead, each target hex must
units are not counted when totaling up units French (2nd Player) set up first: first be observed by an FO, then the FO
present in the hex but may be used to satisfy Four 3-6-4 and three 3-6-3 infantry platoons checked for being "in communications", then
losses. Pinned units may not use any MG die set up anywhere in the Rhein or Wotan trench the request rolled for on the FOT, plus the
roll modifiers they are otherwise eligible for. lines. Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon each in usual Scatter roll.
Also, if a Pinned defending unit is present in any 5 strongpoints west of the Rhein trench Neither player may use Gas Attacks but both
a hex undergoing Close Assault, the attack- lines. Place up to three Wire markers in any may fire Smokescreens.
ing player may subtract -I from the die roll hexes adjacent to the strongpoints between Victory Con ditions: As before, but the
per each Pinned enemy unit. A hex contain- the Rhein and Wotan trench lines. Review French player can avoid future humiliations
ing both a Pinned and unpinned enemy unit Module 5.0 for the French artillery rules. in 1940 by eliminating the FO unit (Rommel)
would suffer a -I to the die roll, if both were French Reinforcements: in this version of the scenario.
Pinned, a -2.
Thrn 5: The French player receives two 3-6-
EXAMPLE: A French infantry platoon en-
4 and two 4-6-5 infantry, plus one 5-9-5 MG
ters a hex with a German Pinned MG pla- Copyright 1994
platoon, on the north edge of the map, west
toon. During the Close Assault Combat, the
of hexrow 29xx.
French player can subtract one from the die Clash of Arms Games
roll and use the +I column to resolve the Victory Conditions: Either player wins by
solel y occupying the large town of St.
Close Assault on. The German receives no
Printed in the USA

F-4
-------1Landships!-------
FIRE ARC DIAGRAMS
Mks I IV & V 1 Mk VIII MG arcs
male &female xMG (2pts)
MG arcs

....
)(
.
:2
u
3: CD
C) CD
Ill
'N Q.
'0
g ~
CJ
...
~
)(
N

• Note: females have 1xMG (2pts)

here with the same fire arc
Instead of a 57mm.
Mks I, IV & V male Tanks
Weapons: 2x57mm Main Guns, 4xMGs
Mks I, IV & V female Tanks
Weapons: 6xMGs
1xMG (2pts)
Mks VIII Tank
Weapons: 2x57mm Main Guns, 7xMGs
• The 2 MGs on each side may fire at
the same or different targets In their
arcs.

1x77mm
Main Gun
Opts)

•-~~~=~~1x77mm Main Gun

(1 Opts)

Vollmer Tank
2x1 MG (2pts each) Weapons: 7xMGs, 4x77mm Main Guns
A7V Tank
Wea ons: 6xMG, 1x57mm Main Gun

1x75mm ion gun (10pts)

Mantis Gunboat
Weapons: 1x6"gun (20pts) & 1x3"gun (10 pts)
each in bow and stern, 5xMGs
with 360 traverse (10pts)
1xMG (2pts) St.Chamond Tank Firefly Gunboat
weapons: 4xMG, 1x75mm Long Gun Weapons: 1x6" gun (20pts) & 1x3"gun (10 pts)
In bow only, 5xMGs
with 360 traverse (10pts)
NOTE: All guns and MGs may engage
separate targets.

s-7
-------1Iandshipsi-------
On Tum 4: Two 4-6-5 infantry platoons with one Flamethrower enter at hex 3433
on Map 3. Also one 4-6-5 infantry and one 2-9-4 MG platoon enter at hex 3533 on
Map3.
On Tum 5: Two 4-6-5 infantry platoons and one FO enter at hex 4217 on Map 5.
On Turn 7: Three 4-6-5 infantry and one 3-9-3 MG platoon with four
Flamethrowers and three AT rifles amongst them enter on Map 5 at hexes 5417 or
5802.
On Tum 9: Two 4-6-5 infantry platoons with one Flamethrower enter at hex 3433
on Map 3. Also one 4-6-5 infantry and one 2-9-4 MG platoon enter at hex 3533 on
Map 3.
Special Rules: The town of Martel on Map 3 does not exist. Treat it as Clear terrain.
Units of the Krebs Garrison once placed, may not move out of the town hexes
selected. WUs may rotate to change facing however.
While the Morale Rating of the German AT gun Crews is the normal4, treat the
Morale Rating of the ART gun Crews as 5.
No Gas Attacks may be used by either side.
Victory Conditions: The British win by having at least one tank or infantry/MG
platoon solely occupying any one of the Beaumont town hexes on Map 5 at the end
of the game. Otherwise the Germans win.
Aftermath: General Haig paid homage to the German gunner, Kruger, who manned
an artillery gun by himselfand destroyed between 7-16 British tanks, firing at ranges
of 500 to 900 yards. By nightfall of Nov. 20th, some 39 Mk. IV tanks were in ruins
which crippled the British offensive. Kruger's body was found next to his artillery
piece turned antitank weapon. Eventually, the Germans counterattacked using their
new Stosstruppen tactics and pushed the British men and their tanks back to the
starting point.
17.12 Scenario: "The First Tank to Tank Battle"
By April 1918, the Germans were within seven miles of Amiens. Their renewed
offensive opened up featuring mustard gas and A7V tanks with a crew of 15- 18
men! The Germans attacked with some 13 tanks catching the British defenders off
guard. History's first tank-to-tank battle occurred near the town ofVillers-Bretennox
as Captain Brown and Lt. Mitchell led their Mk. IV tanks ofCo.N lstTank Batt. out
of Abbe Forest to battle the Germans.
Map Set Up: Use Maps 2 and 6
6 N
A A
Game Length: 10 turns.
Germans (1st Player): 2 Game Length: 15 Turns.
No units on map at start. One Fokker D7 (F) is available at stan. A total of eight
off board artillery modules are available throughout the game.
German Reinforcements:
On Tum I: Eight A7V tanks, four 3-6-4 infantry, three 3-6-3 infantry, three 4-6-5
infantry, two 2-6-4 infantry, one 4-9-5 MG, one 3-9-4 MG, and one 3-9-3 MG pla-
toon with six AT rifles amongst them, along with one FO enter the south edge of
Map 2, east of hex 5433.
On Tum 5: Five A7V tanks (must be from those previously lost or permanently
broken down) enter on Map 2, east of hex 5733. One Junkers Jl (CS) aircraft be-
comes available.
On Tum 6: Three 2-6-5 infantry and one 2-9-3 MG platoon enter at hexes 5033
and/or 5133.
British (2nd Player) sets up first:
On Map2:
Four Mk. IV tanks (two male and two female), TL's Lt. Mitchell and Capt. Brown
plus one 3-9-4 MG and two 4-9-5 MG platoons are placed in any of the town hexes
ofF rontenac.
Place one 5-6-5 infantry platoon in hex 6126.
Place two 4-9-5 MG platoons in hexes 4928 and 5921 .
Place one 3-9-4 MG platoon in hex 5630.
Place two 3-6-4 infantry platoons in hex 5427.
Place two 4-6-5 infantry platoons in hex 5326.
Place one FO in hex 4928.
On Map 6:
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon in hex 5427.
One Sopwith I and 112 (B) and one Bristol F2B (CS) aircraft are available at
stan. The British player has a total ofthrce artillery modules available for the game
starting Tum I.
British Reinforcements:
On Tum 5: Four Whippet tanks enter anywhere along the north edge of Map 6
and four Whippet tanks enter the east edge of Map 6, nonh of hex 7028. One SE5a
(F) aircraft becomes available.
s-8
On Tum 6: Three 3-6-4 infantry and one 3-9-3 MG platoon enter at hex 4022 on
Map 2. One Vickers Gunbus (F) aircraft becomes available.
Special Rules: The German player may only use Gas Attacks on Tum I, and is
limited to one such attack. Both players may use Smokescreens at anytime.
German tank crew rules are in effect (see Section 15.0). MG fire from airplanes
has no effect on German tanks.
Ignore the trench line in hexes 43xx on Map 2, it does not exist. Also ignore the
river on Map 2. Treat it as Clear terrain instead.
Victory Conditions: The German player must:
I) occupy with his infantry/MG platoons (not tanks), any of the hill hexes in or
adjacent to hex 5427 on Map 6 plus woods hexes 5821, 5920, and 5921 on M~p 2,
or;
2) occupy any of the town hexes of Frontenac on Map 2 on the last game tum.
The hexes can be contested (mutually occupied).
Aftermath: Despite being surprised, the men in the male Mk. IV tanks fired at the
A7V's at long range, destroying two of them. The A7V tanks fired back, destroying
the female Mk. IV tanks. Despite the situation, British MG fire proved to wreak
havoc on the German crew's morale inside their tanks forcing many to U-tum and
flee. After the fast Whippet tanks entered, the remaining German A7V tanks began
to lose their nerve, turning around and heading back. The German infantry units
which had advanced were now prey to the Whippets, Mk. IVs and MG fire. The
attack had been blunted and the Germans proved to lack the nerve they would have
a few decades later. For their part the action resulted in a British decision that in the
future no more pure female versions of tanks would be produced. From now on, all
tanks capable of carrying a gun would have one.
17.1 3 Scenario: "The French Tanks Strike!"
While French tanks were often noted as clumsy and poorly designed, on June
IOth, 1918 they proved themselves against the enemy. The Germans had assaulted
French forces south of Ressons-sur-Matz which caused the French LXXVII Corps
to collapse and uncovered the flank of the adjacent XV Ill Corps. Further German
advances would force the XVlll Corps to retreat or be cut off. Gathering up their
available reserves, the French counterattacked with three divisions and four compa-
nies of Schneiders and St. Chamond tanks, plus waves of French aircraft.
Map Set Up: Use Maps 2 and 7
z N
7
Germans (1st Player):
No units on map at start. Three modules of off board artillery are available each
tum at start. One Gotha GV (B), one Junkers Jl (CS) and one Fokker D7 (F) are
available at start.
German Reinforcements:
On Tum I: Six 4-6-5 infantry, three 3-6-5 infantry, two 4-9-5 MG, and one 3-9-4
MG platoons enter anywhere along the east edge of Map 2 along with one FO.
On Tum I: Three 4-6-5 infantry and three 3-6-3 infantry, plus three 4-9-5 MG
platoons enter along the north edge of Map 2, east of hex row 50xx.
On Tum 7: Three trucks and three towed 88mm AA guns, each with a Crew, may
enter along the north edge of Map 2, east of hex row 57xx.
French (2nd Player):
Elements of the XVlll Corps set up first on Map 2:
Three 3-6-4 infantry and one 3-9-4 MG platoon set up anywhere in Frontenac
along with one FO.
One 4-9-5 MG platoon sets up on hex 4928.
OnMap7:
Three 3-6-3 infantry and four 4-6-5 infantry platoons set up in Tramelan.
Two 3-9-4 MG platoons sets up anywhere on Map 7.
Three modules of off board artillery are available each turn at stan.
French Reinforcements:
On Tum 7: Eight Schneider tanks enter on the road on the south edge of Map 7
and eight St. Chamond tanks enter anywhere along the west edge of Map 2. Nine 4-
6-5 infantry and three 4-9-5 MG platoons enter anywhere along the south edge of
Map 2 west ofhexrow 62xx or along the west edge of Map 7. Three Spad 13 (F)
aircraft become available.
Special Rules: The Trench line in hex row 43xx on Map 2 does not exist. The river is
fordable by FT units using Rule 7.lla.
The German 88mm AA guns may be towed by trucks. It takes one entire Vehicle
Movement Phase to load or off-load the guns. Place the gun upside down under the
truck to show it being towed. The guns may not attack while being towed. The truck
loses 2 MPs while towing. If the truck is destroyed while towing, so is the gun.
 - - - - - - - 1 L andships!-------
Victory Conditions: The German player must solely occupy all town hexes of ei-
ther Frontenac orTramelan on either map by the end of the scenario. Otherwise the
French player wins.
Aftermath: The massive French counterattack surprised the Germans and uncov-
ered their flanks. The Germans retreated and the threat to the sector was curtailed.
The French succeeded in capturing 1,000 POWs and 19 guns. The Germans shot up
several French tanks with their 88's. Observing the battle was an American, a Major
GeorgeS. Patton. His comments were that tanks held some promise in battle work-
ing as a combined arms force but that the big French tanks were just too slow and
moved across the countryside poorly. He ordered FT-17s for the Americans.
17.14 Scenario: "Rip the Front"
The first large scale use of the new, fast (8 mph) tank, the Whippet, occurred
August 8th- lOth, 191 8 when 96 of the new tanks belonging to the Australian 6th
Battalion went over the top. The tanks moved out with all four MG's firing.
Map Set Up: Use Maps 5 and 6
Came Length: 9 Turns.
Germans (2nd Player): }i;>-z
Marcelcave Defense Foree sets up first on Map 6: 9 Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon each in hexes 1506, 1507, 1508, 15 10, 15 11 ,
Place two ART guns each with a Crew in hex 6025.
Place one AT gun with a Crew in hex 5427.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon in hex 5128•.
Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon in hex 5025• .
Place one 3-9-5 MG platoon each in hexes 4721 and 4829•.
Place one 2-6-4 infantry platoon and an FO in hex 4826.
Place one 3-6-3 infantry platoon each in hexes 4628 and 4828.
On Map 5:
Place two ART guns each with a Crew in hex 6206.
Place one AT gun with a Crew each in hexes 5714 and 5807.
Place four 4-6-5 infantry and two 4-9-5 MG platoons with two Flamethrowers
amongst them, and one FO in any of the Beaumont town hexes.
Place one 2-6-4 infantry platoon each in hexes 4612• and 4606•.
Place one 2-9-3 MG platoon each in hexes 4510 and 4607.
Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon and one FO each in hexes 4508• and 4613•.
• indicates one AT rifle also is placed in hex.
German Reinforcements:
On Tum 3: Five 4-6-5 infantry and one 4-9-5 MG platoon enter along the south
edge of Map 5 at any hex. One Fokker D7 (F) and one Junkers Jl (CS) aircraft
become available.
On Tum 8: Three 3-6-4 infantry, one 3-9-4 MG and two 2-9-3 MG platoons enter
along the south edge of Map 5 at any hex.
British (1st Player):
No units on map at start. One Spad 13 (F), one Nieuport 17 (F), and one Handley
Page (B) are available at start.
British Reinforcements:
On Tum I on Map 5: Nine Whippets and three Mk. IV (male) tanks enter at hexes
4009 or 4013. At least three tanks must enter at each hex.
On Tum I on Map 5: Two 4-9-5 MG platoons enter at hexes 53 17 or 4717, two 4-
9-5 infantry platoons may enter at hexes 5217, 5017 or4817, one 4-6-5 infantry and
one 3-9-4 MG platoon enter at hex 4917, three 4-6-5 infantry and one 4-9-5 MG
platoon enter at hexes 4009 and 4013.
On Tum I on Map 6: Three 3-6-4 infantry and one 3-9-4 MG platoon enter at hex
4025. Three 2-6-4 infantry platoons enter at hexes 4317 and 4418. One 3-6-4 infan-
try and one 5-9-5 MG platoon enter at hex 4618. One 5-6-5 infantry and one 4-9-5
.. MG platoon enter at hex 4717. Two 3-6-3 infantry platoons enter at hex 4818.
On Tum 2: A total of eight off board artillery modules become available for the
rest of the game.
On Tum 3: Three Whippet tanks (must be from those previously lost) may enter
at hex 5218 on Map 6.
Special Rules: Neither player may make Gas Attacks. Each German on board ART
gun has only one Fire Phase of ammo per game available (due to ammo shonages).
So it may fire once in the Barrage Phase, or up to three times in a Fire Phase using
AFTAs. Once used, remove the gun and Crew from play.
Victory Conditions: The British Player must solely occupy all of the town hexes of
Beaumont on Map 5, plus hexes 6025 and 5427 on Map 6 by the end of the scenario.
Otherwise the German player wins.
Aftermath : The initial British advance was a resounding victory and a black day for
the Germans. The Germans were horrified at the sight of so many tanks and within
two hours, the Whippets had forced 16,000 men to surrender. During that time, the
Whippets had gained seven miles. However, as the tanks and men penetrated, deep
resistance was bound to show up and show up it did, alive and well at Mareelcave.
s-9
The Germans had deployed in depth and were poised on key hills. Their AT guns
and artillery pieces destroyed 20 of the Whippets before the town fell.
17.15 Scenario: "Patton: T he Man and His Hour"
At 0500 on September 12th, 1918 Col. George Panon and his 1st Tank Brigade
moved into no man's land in America's first tank assault. The brigade was primarily
armed with the French Renault FT 17 tank, a two-man tank armed with a MG in the
turret. Of the 168 tanks which attacked toward St. Mihiel, 23 were ditched, 21 broke
down, and an equal amount ran out of gas. While many tanks did linle, several tanks
advanced rapidly showing the infamous "Patton Dash" leaving the infantry far to the
rear. As the tanks approached the villages of Essey and Pannes, the tankers startled
the withdrawing Germans, destroying machine gun nests and a battalion of anillery.
Map Set Up: Use Maps 7 and 4
Game Length: I0 turns.
Americans (1st Player) set up second:
Elements of the U.S. 1st and 42nd Divisions on Map 7:
1512, 1514, 1515, and 1516.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon each in hexes 1509 and 1513.
Place one 3-9-4 MG platoon each in hexes 1507 and 1515.
Place one 3-9-3 MG platoon in hex 1512.
Place one Renault FT 17 tank each in hexes 1406, 1407, 1408 (with TL Panon),
1506, 1507 and 1508.
OnMap 4:
Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon each in hexes 1621 , 1622, 1623, 1625, 1627,
1628and 1629.
Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon each in hexes 1618, 1630 and 1631.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon each in hexes 1626 and 1627.
Place one 5-9-5 MG platoon and one FO in hex 1633.
Place one 5-6-5 infantry platoon in hex 1621 .
Place one 3-9-3 MG platoon in hex I626.
Place one 3-9-4 MG platoon in hex 1631 .
Place one 2-9-4 MG platoon in hex 1630.
Place one Renault FT 17 tank each in hexes 1429, 1430, 1431, I 528, 1529 and
1530.
Three aircraft (American player's choice) are available at stan. The U.S. Player
has a total of I0 off board artillery modules available throughout the game.
Smokescreens may be used but no Gas Attacks are allowed.
U.S. Reinforcements:
On Tum 4: Three FT 17 tanks (must be from those previously lost or permanently
broken down) may enter anywhere along the south edge of Map 7. Also four 3-6-3
and three 2-6-4 infantry plus one 3-9-3 MG platoon enter Map 4 between hexes
2133-2433.
On Tum 7: Three FT 17 tanks (must be from those previously lost or permanently
broken down) enter at hex 2833 on Map 4. Also three 3-6-3 and three 3-6-4 infantry
platoons enter on Map 4 at hexes 3233 and 3533 respectively.
Germans (2nd Player) set up first:
Elements of the German 192nd Division on Map 7:
Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon in hex 1706.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon in hex 1707.
Place one 2-6-4 and one 3-6-4 infantry platoon in hex 1709.
Place one 3-9-4 MG platoon in hex 1710.
Place one 2-6-4 infantry platoon in hex 1711 .
Place one 3-6-3 infantry platoon in hex 1712.
Place one 3-6-3 infantry platoon in hex 1713f.
Place one AT gun with a crew in hex 2809.
Place one 2-6-3 infantry platoon in hex 1714.
Place one 3-6-3 infantry platoon in hex 1815.
Place one 3-9-3 MG platoon in hex 191 5.
Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon in hex 1917.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon in hex 2114.
Place one 3-9-3 MG platoon in hex 19 11 .
Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon and one FO in hex 1907.
Place one 2-6-3 and one 4-6-5 infantry platoons in hex 2307.
Place one 3-6-3 and one 4-6-5 infantry platoons in hex 2408.
Place one 2-6-3 and one 3-6-3 infantry platoons in hex 2508
Place one 3-9-4 MG platoon in hex 211 Of.
On Map4:
Place one 3-6-3 infantry platoon in hex 1919.
Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon in hex 1920
Place one 3-6-3 infantry platoon in hex 1922f.
-------1Landships!--- -- - -
Place two 2-6-3 infantry platoons in hex 1923f.
Place one 2-6-3 infantry platoon in hex 1924.
Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon in hex 1925f.
Place one 2-6-3 infantry and one 2-9-3 MG platoon in hex 1926.
Place one 2-6-4 infantry platoon in hex 1927.
Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon each in hexes 1928, 1929 and 1931.
Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon in hex 1930f.
Place one 2-6-4 infantry platoon in hex 1932.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon each in hexes 2124 and 2322.
Place two 4-6-5 infantry platoons each in hexes 2332 and 2425.
Place one FO in hex 2326.
Place one AT Gun with a Crew in hex 2721 .
Place one ART gun with a Crew in hex 3322.
An "f' denotes a Flamethrower is placed in hex also.
The German player also a has a total of four off board artillery modules through-
out the game available from the stan.
Place a Wire marker in each hex listed below:
Map 7: 1606, 1607, 1608, 1609, 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, 1614, 1715 and 1817.
Map 4: 1818, 1820, 1821, 1822, 1823, 1824, 1826, 1827, 1828 and 1831.
Special Rules: No German unit may move on Tum 1. German FT units which begin
the game on a road must always move, thereafter, towards St. Angelique on Map 4
until they reach it.
Due to the large amount of rain that had fallen over the previous 5 days, much of
the ground was extremely muddy. Treat all clear terrain hexes as "rough" terrain in
this scenario (increases chance of tank breakdown).
All Renault FT-17s are MG armed.
Victory Conditions: The U.S. player must be the sole occupier of both Tramelan on
Map 7 and St. Angelique on Map 4 by the end of the game. If any German unit
occupies any hex in either town, the Germans win even if U.S. units are present.
Aftermath: The Germans had known about the American plans for the St. Mihiel
offensive and accordingly withdrew most of their better troops when the attack be-
gan. What fighting there was was against the rearguard troops protecting those which
were still withdrawing. These were the troops which were surprised by the dash of
American tanks. Patton was reprimanded for disregarding orders and for fighting his
own war, just as he would be some 25 years later as a general.
17.16 Scenario: "The Race To Damascus"
As the end drew near, Gen. Allenby sent his cavalry and armored cars literally
streaking to take Damascus before the Turks could get there and prepare defenses.
The 3rd Australian Light Horse and 5th Cavalry Divisions located near Tibelias and
Deraa were sent galloping. The armored cars followed. The Turks were waiting at
Keswash and Sasa and on Sept. 27th, 1918 fought a tenacious bitter rearguard action
Map Set.Up: Use Maps 6 and 8 1
Game Length: 9 Turns . 8
I
hoping to delay the British to allow many retreating Turks to reach Damascus.
6 A
N
British (1st Player):
No units on the board at stan. Four modules of off board anillery are available
each tum for the entire game.
British Reinforcements:
On Tum I: Any nine cavalry and three cavalry MG platoons in mounted mode
enter along the west map edge of Map 8, at Charge speed.
On Tum 3: Two Rolls Royce, one Austin and one Ford armored car (Armored Car
Battalion No. 7) may enter Map 6 at any hex along the south edge. Also any six
cavalry platoons in mounted mode enter Map 6 between hexes 4333-4833 at either
speed.
Tur ks (2nd Player) set up fi rst:
Elements of the Turkish rearguard all set up in the trenches and town hexes within
the surrounded mine belt on Map 8:
Six 4-6-5 and three 3-6-4 infantry platoons.
Four 4-9-5 MG platoons.
Four ART guns with Crews.
Three FOs.
Six Wire markers are placed anywhere south of the mine belt.
Elements of the retreating forces are withdrawing off the east edge of Map 6. All
units listed here must set up on the road along hexes 4226 to 4925 on Map 6. Each
hex of road may have only two units at most stacked on it:
Seven 3-6-3 and four 3-6-4 infantry platoons
Two 3-9-3 MG and two 2-9-3 MG platoons
Special Rules: All printed minefield hexes are active. For each mined hex a British
cavalry unit enters, roll a die: on a I or 2 the unit is Pinned, a 6 and the unit is
eliminated. On any other roll nothing happens. Armored Cars suffer Wheel Damage
s - 10
on a roll of I through 3. Once the British player penetrates the Turkish mine belt, no
further hexes inside it are mined.
The British player has no FO or Aircraft in this scenario. Instead, all trench hexes
are Automatically Observed by the off board British artillery in this scenario (not
just the first row) in addition to the standard rules regarding town hexes.
Victory Conditions: The Turks win if they can exit nine infantry/MG platoons off
the east side of Map 6 by the end of the game. The British win by preventing it and
by occupying any of the town of AI Rami on Map 8 with at least one unit by the end
of the game. Any other result is a draw.
Aftermath: It was a British romp with not a soul getting away.
17. 17 Scenario: " The Yanks Have Arr ived"
The American 301st Heavy Tank Battalion first went into action on September
28th, 1918, attacking the Hindenburg defense line at Ronssoy with 34 tanks, mainly
Map Set Up: Use Map 2
Game Length: I0 Turns
D
Mk. IVs and Mk. Vs. A strong German rearguard was waiting.
AN
Americans (1st Player):
No units on map at start The U.S. player has a total of six off board artillery
modules throughout the game, available at stan.
U.S. Reinforcements:
On Tum I: Nine 4-6-5 infantry, one 2-6-4 infantry, three 3-6-4 infantry, six 4-9-5
MG and two 3-9-4 MG platoons, plus one FO, enter at any hex along the west map
edge. Also on Tum I nine Mk. IV male tanks with TL Lt. Dunning enter between
hexes 7021 and 7024 and eight Mk. V male tanks with TL Lt. Kusener enter between
hexes 7028 and 7031.
On Tum 4: Three 4-6-5 infantry and one 2-6-3 infantry platoon, and two 4-9-5
MG and one 3-9-3 MG platoon enter anywhere along the west map edge.
On Tum 5: One 5-6-5 infantry platoon plus one FO enter at hex 5317. Four 4-6-
5 infantry platoons enter at hex 5218. One 5-9-5 MG platoon enters at hex 5517.
On Tum 6: Three Mk. IV or Mk. V tanks (must be from those previously lost)
enter at hex 4618.
Germans (2nd Player) set up first:
Ronssou Defense Garrison:
Place two 4-6-5 infantry platoons each in hexes 6429 and 6431 .
Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon each in hexes 6423, 6424, 6425, 6428 and 6430.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon each in hexes 5630, 5921, 6425 and 6428.
Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon in hex 6427• .
Place two 3-6-4 infantry platoons each in hexes 6426• and 6622• .
Place one 3-6-3 infantry platoon each in hexes 6522• , 6621• and 6620•.
Place one 3-9-3 MG platoon each in hexes 6522 and 6621 .
Place one 2-9-3 MG platoon in hex 5920.
Place one AT gun with a Crew each in hexes 4928, 5326 and 5630.
Place one FO each in hexes 4622 and 5630.
Place one 2-9-4 MG platoon each in 5326 and 5427
Place three 2-6-4 infantry, one 3-6-3 infantry and one 3-9-4 MG platoon any-
where in Frontenac.
Place one ART gun with a Crew each in hexes 4620, 4520, 4422 and 4523.
Place Wire markers in hexes: 6732, 6632, 6531 through 6523, 6731 , 6631through
6623, 6721 and 6722.
• Hex also has one AT Rifle placed in it.
German Reinforcements:
On Tum 5: One 3-6-4 infantry and one 2-6-4 infantry platoon with two AT rifles
and two Flamethrowers, plus one FO, enter on the nonh edge oft he map, east of hex
5733.
Special Rules: Neither player may make Gas Attacks. Each German on board ART
gun has only one Fire Phase of ammo per game available (due to ammo shonages).
So it may fi re once in the Barrage Phase, or up to three times in a Fire Phase using
AFTAs. Once used, remove the gun and Crew from play.
Ignore the trench line running in the 43xx hexrow. It does not exist. The liver is
fordable by FT units and may be crossed using Rule 7 . II a.
Victory Conditions: The U.S. player must occupy or be the last to solely occupy all
the town hexes of Frontenac by the end of the game. Otherwise the German wins.
Aftermath: The attack on Ronssoy was a tough nut to crack as German resistance
proved to be worse than expected. Heroics, courtesy of Lt. Kusener and Lt. Dun-
ning, proved the Yanks were here to stay. The pair entered the town with their tank
guns blazing. The town finally fell and the Huns withdrew. Ten tanks were destroyed.
17. 18 Scenario: "Counterattack atAgwoint"
On October 8th, 1918, during the Allies' successful Second Cambrai Offensive,
the Germans again deployed their armor to stem the attack. Fielding a mix of cap-
tured British Mk. IVs and their own few remaining A7Vs, some 8-14 tanks overall,
- - - - - - -1Landships! - - - - - - -
D
they counterattacked near Agwoint. This second appearance of German annor was
promptly met by a British tank force.
Map Set Up: Use Map 7 A and two LVG V (CS) aircraft are available from the start.
Game Length: 9 Turns.
British (1st Player):
No units on map at start. One Sopwith I and 112 (B) aircraft is available at start.
British Reinforcements:
On Tum I: Four 3-6-3 infantry and two 3-9-3 MG platoons plus one FO enter at
hexes 1008 and I009. Three 3-6-4 infantry and one 2-9-5 MG platoon enter at hexes
2417 and 2517. Two 3-6-4 infantry and two 3-9-4 MG platoons enter at hexes 1517
and 1617. One Mk. IV male tank each enters at hexes 1008, 1009, lOll and 1012.
Two Mk. IV male tanks each enter at hexes 2617 and 2717.
On Tum 2: Three Mk. IV male tanks enter at hexes 2617 and 2717. The British
player also receive a total of two otT board artillery modules available for the rest of
the game. No Gas Attacks are allowed, but Smokescreens are permitted.
On Turn 4: Three Mk. IV male tanks (from among those previously lost) enter at
hex 1008.
On Tum 6: Two 4-6-5 infantry, one 5-6-5 infantry and two 4-9-5 MG platoons
enter at hex I008. Three Mk. IV male tanks (from among those previously lost)
enter at hex 2317.
Germans (2nd Player) set up first:
Place one AT gun with a Crew and one 4-9-5 MG platoon with one AT rifle in hex
2114.
Place one 4-6-5 infantry and one 3-9-3 MG platoon with one Flamethrower and
one AT gun with a Crew in hex 1911.
Place one 2-9-4 MG platoon with one AT rifle in hex 2108.
Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon with two AT rifles and one AT gun with a Crew
in hex 2009.
Place one AT gun with a Crew in hex 2809.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon and one AT gun with a Crew in hex 1908.
Place one 4-9-5 MG and one 3-9-4 MG platoon plus a FO in hex 1907.
German Reinforcements:
On Tum 2: Three German Mk. IV male tanks (captured) enter at hexes 2701 and
2802. Four A7V tanks enter at hexes 4015 and 4016.
On Tum 6: Three A7V tanks enter at hex 4015. Two 3-6-4 and one 4-6-5 infantry
plus two 3-9-3 MG platoons enter at hexes 4015, 4016 and 4017.
Special Rules: All German AT guns must face w~t during set up. The German
player must use the German Mk. IV tank counters to simulate his captured stock.
German tank crew rules are in effect (see Module 15.0).
All British tanks must expend all their entire movement allowance upon first en-
tering the map. Also all British tanks must end their initial move facing west or
north. British units can capture and use German Weapon Units.
Victory Conditions: The British win if they solely control all hexes in the town of
Tramelan and no mobile German tanks remain by the end of the scenario. Otherwise
the German player wins.
After math: The British destroyed two German tanks immediately. This had the
predictable impact upon most of the remaining German crews to tum and run. How-
ever, a few brave German tanks did venture on, which in tum drew more British
tanks. The British succeeded in taking the town despite a few tense moments. Over-
all, another poor performance for the infant German tank force. A nice try but no
cigar.
17.19 Scenario: " Bridgeheads Across the Piave"
In this last offensive designed to knock out Austria out of the war, three British,
two French, and 30 Italian divisions of the 8th, IOth and 12th Armies, along with
one American regiment, attacked some 34 Austrian divisions on Oct 24th, 1918.
Map Set Up: Use Maps I and 2
1 N
Game Length: 13 Turns. A British Reinforcements:
Austrians (1st Player) set up first:
On Map 1: 2 Map 5. Five Char 2C tanks enter north edge of either map. Also five Mk. VIII male
Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon each in hexes 2404, 2406, 2407, 2409, 2411,
2414, 2314, 2217, 2805, 2708 and 2217.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon each in hexes 2904, 2808 and 2911.
Place one ART gun and a Crew in hex 3509.
On Map2:
Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon each in hexes 4928, 5326, 4925, 5025, 5021,
5022, 4628, 4727, and 5427.
Place one 3-9-3 MG platoon each in hexes 5628 and 4928.
Place one 2-9-4 MG platoon in hex 57 18.
Place one 3-9-4 MG platoon in hex 5821 .
s - 11
Place one ART gun and a Crew each in hexes 6528 and 6522.
Place a total of three FOs on either map. One Albatross (F), one Fokker 07 (F),
Allies (2nd Player) sets up second:
On Map 1:
Place three ART guns with Crews in or adjacent to hex 1609.
Place one 3-6-4 infantry platoon each in hexes 2205, 2206, 2207, 2209 and 2210.
Place one 3-6-3 infantry platoon each in hexes 2209, 2212, 2213, 2014, 2015 and
2016.
Place one 3-9-4 MG platoon each in hexes 2207, 2209 and 2211.
Place one 3-9-3 MG platoon each in hexes 2212, 2014 and 2105.
On Map 2:
Place one 4-6-5 infantry platoon each in hexes 4820, 4821, 4823, 4925, 4824,
4725,4526,4425,4327,5018 and 5019.
Place one 5-9-5 MG platoon each in hex 4723.
Place one 4-9-5 MG platoon each in hexes 4523, 4622, 4521 , 4623, 4824, 4923
and 4725.
Place three FT 17 tanks in any town hex of Frontenac.
Place a total of three FOs on either map. Two Caproni CA3 (B), two Ansa! do
SVA (CS) aircraft, one Handley-Page (B), one Sopwith Salamander (CS) and two
Sopwith SE5a (F) are available from the start.
Allied Reinforcements:
On Tum 4: Any nine cavalry platoons, two Ford and two Austin armored cars
appear in any hex of Frontenac on Map 2.
Special Rules: The bridges in hexes 2306 and 2312 on Map I do not exist, instead a
river flows through those hexes. The bridge across the river does exist on Map 2.
The Austrian may blow it up with aircraft, by scoring an "E" hit on the Bombing
Table. Allied FT units (not CT or Vehicles) may cross the river using Rule 7.II a.
All roads on Map I east of the river are treated as trenches instead.
To simulate the modifications the Italians made to their tanks, each FT 17 is
considered to be a Fiat 3000, with two MGs in its turret, instead of the normal one,
with the same field of fire.
Victory Conditions: The Allies win by eliminating all theAustrian units and have at
least 8 infantry/MG platoons move otT of the east map edge. Otherwise the Austri-
ans win.
Aftermath: For three days a battle raged and finally the British 23rd Division, along
with other Allied units, succeeded in establishing three bridgeheads across the Piave
River. By Oct. 28th, the three bridgeheads had joined and by the 30th, the Allies had
seized Vittorio Veneto. From there the Austrian front crumbled as the Italians pur-
sued with armored cars, cavalry, tanks and aircraft.
17.20 Scenar io: " Monsters In the Wire" (Hypothetical)
Had the war gone on another year, the monster tanks planned by both sides might
well have appeared on the battlefield. These tanks were huge and each of the major
powers had plans and prototypes already made in 1918. The Germans had their
giant "K-Wagen" Vollmer tank, the French had the Char 2C and the British had the
B >,
Mk. VIII"Liberty". These all would have clashed by Spring 1919. It makes for an
interesting game,
Maps Used: 5 and 6
Game Length: Keep playing until either side fulfills the Victory Conditions or a
forced draw from lack of tanks occurs.
British (1st Playe.r):
No units on map at start. The British player also has a total of six otT board artil-
lery modules throughout the game available from the start. Two Spad 13 (F) and twO'
Salmson 2 (CS) aircraft are available at start.
On Turn I: Nine 4-6-5 infantry platoons enter anywhere along the north edge of
"Liberty" tanks enter anywhere along the north edge of Map 6.
Germans (2nd Player):
One AT gun with a Crew each in hexes 4905 and 50 I0 on Map 5.
One 4-9-5 MG platoon each in hex 5427 on Map 6 and hex 6206 on Map 5.
Four 4-6-5 infantry platoons in any town hex of Beaumont on Map 5.
One Fokker 07 (F), one Junkers Jl (CS), and one Gotha GV (B) aircraft are
available at start.
-------1Landships!-------
German Reinforcements:
On Tum I : Two Vollmer tanks enter anywhere along the south edge on either
map. Also, four A7Vs enter anywhere along the west edge of Map 6, south of hex row
52xx.
Special Rules: German tank crew rules (see Module 15.0) are not in effect. They're
assumed to have their act together by now.
Victory Conditions: The British Player must solely occupy the town of Beaumont
on Map 5 and exit at least 5 tanks off the south edge to win. The German Player must
maintain at least one platoon sized unit in Beaumont and exit 3 tanks off the north
map edge to win. Any other outcome is a draw.
17.21 Scenario: " Plan 1919" (Hypothetical)
Plan 1919 envisaged a huge attack along a 90 mile front with extensive use of the
new Medium D tanks, tentatively some 800 of them. These fast tanks would break
through the front lines and race to the rear areas some 20 miles away and wreak
havoc. Behind the fast tanks, the ordinary heavier tanks would follow up. This sce-
nario simulates a breakthrough into the rear area of the German front line, as envi-
sioned in the plan.
N
Map Set Up: Use Maps 2, 5 and 6
A Special Rules: The trench line in hex row 43xx on Map 2 does not exist. All rivers
. -2- - - - - - - - - - , 1
Game Length: 14 Turns.
British (1st Player):
No units on map at start. The British player receives two Handley Page (B) type
and one Salamander (CS) type aircraft available at start.
ABBREVIATED SEQUENCE OF PLAY
4.1 First Player's Barrage Phase
a. Nominate target hexes and announce the type of Barrage/Ammo
to be used. Check for being "in communications" and roll on the
Fire Order Table (FOT) to see if the request is honored. Roll for
Scatter. Roll on the Barrage Combat Results Table to see if a Hit
has occurred. Resolve the effect of the Hit on all targets in the hex.
4.2 First Player's Vehicle and Cavalry Movement (only) Phase
a. Move all Vehicles up to the limit of their Movement Allow-
ances (check Tanks for Break Downs at end of move).
b. The Second player makes Morale Checks for Tank Fright (only
in certain scenarios).
c. Choose the Trot or Charge movement mode for CT units and
move them up to the limit of their Movement Allowance. Mount/
Dismount any CT units at the start or end of this phase.
d. The Second player makes Morale Checks for any Charged units
subject to Cavalry Fright.
4.3 Second Player's Defensive AT Fire Phase (vs. Vehicles only)
Only the First player's Vehicles may be fired at using any avail-
able Anti-Tank weapons. ART and AT guns may change facing to
bring enemy Vehicles within their fire arc.
4.4 First Player' s 1st Foot Troop Movement Phase
All First player's non-pinned Foot Troop units (i nfantry and MG
platoons, Crews and Individuals) may move.
4.5 Second Player 's Defensive Small Arms Fire Phase
The Second player's units perform Small Arms Fire Attacks at
enemy Soft Targets or at any Vehicles vulnerable to Small Arms
Fire Attacks.
4.6 Second Player's Pin Removal Phase
a. Any Second player's Pinned units recover to normal status.
4.7 Joint Aircraft Phase
a. The First player places all of his Aircraft types first, followed
by the Second player placing his F types to intercept.
Copyright 1994 Clash of Arms Games
s - 12
Britlsh Reinforcements:
On Turn I: Five Medium D tanks, five Mk. VIII male "Liberty" tanks, and five
Whippet tanks enter the east edge of Map 5 along the roads. Twelve 4-6-5 infantry
platoons enter anywhere along the east edge of Map 5.
On Tum 2: The British player receives another five Whippet tanks anywhere along
the east edge of Map 2, north of hex 7021 .
German Rear Area Forces (2nd Player) sets up first:
Place six 4-6-5 infantry platoons with six AT rifles among them anywhere in the
woods hexes on Map 5.
Place two AT guns with Crews and three 4-9-5 MG platoons in Beaumont or
strongpoint hexes on the hill on Map 5.
Place three ART guns with Crews anywhere on Map 6.
Place three 3-64 infantry, three 2-64 infantry, and two 3-9-3 MG platoons in
Frontenac on Map 2.
Place three 4-6-5 infantry platoons with three AT rifles amongst them in any
trench or woods hex on Map 2.
Place one AT gun with Crew in hex 4928 on Map 2.
Place two LK II tanks in Frontenac on Map 2.
One Fokker 07 (F) aircraft is available at start.
are fordable by FT units using Rule 7.lla.
Victory Conditions: To win, the British Player must solely occupy Frontenac on
Map 2 and Beaumont on Map 5 by the end of the game, and have at least ten
undestroyed tanks remaining (Broken Down is OK), otherwise the Germans win.
Aftermath: While the scenario never did happen it does demonstrate the impact of
the newer, fast tanks.
b. Resolve Air-to-Air combat between opposing F type Aircraft
first, then the Second player's surviving F types may attack the
First player's B and/or CS types.
c. The Second player conducts any AA Fire Attacks.
d. The First player's CS types flying Artillery Observation Mis-
sions may Observe target hexes and adjust Barrage Attack Target
markers.
e. The First player conducts any Bombing (CS and B types) and
Strafing (CS types only) missions.
4.8 Joint Close Assault Combat Phase
a. During this Phase, if enemy and friendly units both occupy the
same hex, or when the Phasing player's non-vehicle units that are
adjacent to enemy occupied hexes declare they will initiate Close
Assault Combat and move into them (free move) a round of Close
Assault Combat occurs.
b. Resolve any Close Assault Combats.
4.9 First Player 's Offensive Fire Phase
a. All First player's units which did not engage in Close Assault
Combat conduct Anti-Tank and Small Arms Fire Attacks. No fac-
ing changes are permitted.
4.10 First Player's 2nd Foot Troop Movement Phase
a. All First player's non-pinned Foot Troops move again except
those that engaged in Close Assault Combat.
4.11 First Player's Pin Removal Phase
a. Any First player's Pinned units to normal status. Temporarily
Broken Down Vehicles that did not fire this turn may try to Repair
themselves.
b. Remove the Second player's Smokescreens and Gas markers.
4.12 Second Player Thrn
The Second player becomes the phasing player and repeats Sec-
tions 4.1 through 4.11 reversing the roles of First and Second player.
At the conclusion of this, one Game Turn is completed and play
reverts back to the original First Player.
Printed in the USA
- - - - - -- 1Landships!- - - - - - -
then is +2 (four minus two). However. the Tanlc also
provides a one column shift to the left when defending
(see Rule 12.31 below) so the final column on the
CACRTtouseis the "+1 ". The German rolls the die. A
throw ofa "3" becomes a "4" because ofthe British
MG platoon (see Rule 12.32 below), so both players
lose I unit. The British player must lose the MG pla-
toon, the German must lose one infantry platoon also,
leaving the British Tanlc and three German infantry pla-
toons in the hex. No further combat is allowed until the
next Close Assault Phase.
12.23 Vehicles Alone: When friendly Tanks or ACs
enter an enemy hex containing only enemy FT or CT
platoons (and no friendly FT or CT platoons are also
present), then during the Close Assault Phase make a
Morale Check for each defending enemy unit. !fit rolls
less than or equal to its MR, the unit passes and be-
comes Pinned in the hex. Ifthe unit rolls over its MR, it
fails and must instead Retreat two hexes and then be-
comes Pinned.
EXAMPLE: During the Vehicle Movement Phase, a
British Tank enters an enemy held hex containing one
German infantry platoon. There is no Close Assault
Combat. In the Close Assault Phase simply roll a Mo-
rale Checkfor the infantry platoon and apply the pass
or fail result. However. had a British infantry platoon
entered the hex also, no Morale Check would have hap-
pened. Instead Close Assault Combat would have oc-
curred.
12.24 Restrictions: Trucks, Crews, TLs, and FOs may
not be used to satisfy losses suffered in Close Assault
Combat. In essence, they contribute nothing and are
eliminated if alone in a hex with enemy units.
12.3 Close Assault Modifiers
Both sides may claim a number of Close Assault
modifiers when resolving the attack. These are listed
below.
12.3 1 Column Shift Modifiers: Using the following
eolumn shift modifiers in any Close Assault:
I) If Close Assault Combat occurs in a Town, shift
the final column one to the left. This could result in the
defender becoming the attacker if the initial column
was"O".
2) If at least one or more Tanks (but not ACs) are
present in the hex with friendly platoons, shift the final
column once (only) to the right (if attacking) or to the
left (when defending) in addition to counting each Tank
(and AC) as a platoon.
12.32 Die Roll Modifiers: Using the following die roll
modifiers in any Close Assault:
I) For each attacking/defending MG platoon present
in the hex, modify the die roll by -I /+ I. (Do not count
mounted cavalry MG platoons fort his bonus however.)
2) For each attacking/defending flamethrower present
in the hex, modify the die roll by -21+2.
NOTE: Use ofaflamethrower in Close Assault Com-
bat does not use up a shot.
12.33 Pinned Units in CloseAssault: Pinned units are
not counted when totaling up units present in the hex
but may be used to satisfy losses. Pinned units may not
use any MG/Fiamethrower die roll modifiers they are
otherwise eligible for. Also, if a Pinned defending unit
is present in a hex unde'l!oing Close Assault, the at-
tacking player may subtract -1 from the die roll per
each Pinned enemy unit. A hex containing both a Pinned
and unpinned enemy unit would suffer a -I to the die
roll, if both were Pinned, a -2.
EXAMPLE: A British infantry platoon enters a hex
with a Pinned German MG platoon. During the Close
Assault Combat, the British player can subtract one
from the die roll and use the +I column to resolve the
Ciose Assault on. The German receives no MG die roll
bonus. Had the German not been Pinned, the 0 column
would be used with a +I die roll modifier.
NOTE: All column shifts and die roll modifiers listed
above are cumulative. These modifiers apply to either
side during the Close Assault Combat.
13.0 WEAPON UNITS IN COMBAT
The Weapon Units provided in the game offer pow-
erful defenses against Tank attacks. WUs can be either
man portable ones, easily carried by platoons, or be
heavy, specialized Crew served types.
13.1 Man Portable Weapons
AT rifles and Flamethrowers can be carried by pla-
toon sized Foot Troop units (but not Crews or Individu-
als or CT units).
13.11 General Rule: AT rifles and Flamethrowers can
only be carried and fired by German infantry and MG
platoons. German CT units and Crews may not use these
two WUs, nor may lndividuals.Any number ofAT rifles,
and up to a maximum number of three Flamethrowers,
may be carried by a single platoon. A platoon can also
fire all of them each tum, during the appropriate Fire
Phases in addition to using its normal Small Arms Fire
Strength.
EXAMPLE: A German infantry platoon has 3 AT
rifles and I Flamethrower. During an Offensive Fire
Phase, the platoon could make a Small Arms Fire At-
tack once using its normal FS value, fire each AT rifle
up to 3 times at enemy Vehicles (a total of nine shots).
as well as use the Flamethrower once. all at different
targets.
a. A Pinned platoon may still hold onto its Anti-Tank
rifles and Flamethrowers with no restrictions. Should a
platoon be Eliminated while carrying either type, the
WU counter remains in the hex. Only German platoons
which enter the hex can pick them up and use them.
Should Allied units enter a hex containing AT rifles or
Flamethrowers, the WUs are Eliminated.
13.12 AT Rifle Rules: AT rifles may fire
up to three times during the Defensive AT
Fire Phase or Offensive Fire Phase at en-
emy Vehicles. They have a range of I hex
so they must be in or adjacent to the target hex to en-
gage it. A platoon with more than one AT rifle may all
fire at the same Vehicle. AT rifles are not subject to To
Hit modifiers, as are other WUs. Instead, when using
AT rifles, a simple roll of 1-2 on a six sided die indi-
cates a "Hit". !fa Hit occurs, a subsequent roll of 1-2
on a six sided die indicates the Vehicle has suffered a
Break Down. Any other series of rolls indicates there is
no effect. Roll on the Type of Break Down Chart to
determine the severity of the Break Down. AT rifles
may switch ta'l!ets once a hit has been scored, even if
nothing happens from the hit. AT Rifles have no effect
on Soft T311!et types.
13. 13 Flame throwe r Rules: 30
Flamethrowers have both ATFA and ~~
SAFA capability. Flamethrowers also have ~ and direct fire Barrage Attacks (see Module 5.0). An
a range of I hex and so must be in or adja- 2 ahota left
cent to the target hex to fire. Units armed with
Flamethrowers can attack a hex twice during a Small
Arms Fire Phase, once using the Flamethrower (a 2-3
man operation) and after resolving that attack, once
again using the unit(s) normal FS value at the hex ex-
ecuting a normal SAFA. A Flamethrower cannot fire
twice in the same Anti-Tank or Small Arms Fire Phase,
nor can it be combined with other units (or
Flamethrowers) when resolvi ng the attack. A
Flamethrower can only be used twice overall in a game.
After the first use, flip the counter over to refl ect this.
After the second use, remove the counter.
R - 13
a. When using a Flamethrower to conduct a SAFA,
the attacker automatically uses the 30+ column on the
SACRT. If a Hit is achieved, any subsequent Morale
Check roll is adjusted by adding +I to the unit's die
roll.
EXAMPLE: A German infantry platoon has two
Flamethrowers. Using one Flamethrower during the
Offensive Fire Phase, it fires once at an adjacent en-
emy unit, in a Strongpoint causing a Pin. A second at-
tack using the other Flamethrower misses. Immediately
afterward, the same infantry platoon and a nearby MG
platoon conduct a SAFA at the same enemy unit using
their normal printed FS values. They score a lucky Hit,
and cause a second Pin result, thus f orcing it to Re-
treat as well.
b. When using Flamethrowers to conduct AFTAs
against Vehicles, again only one shot per Fire Phase
may be fired. A six sided die roll of 1-3 is a "Hit" and
eliminates the Vehicle from play. No other modifiers
apply.
13.14 MGs and Weakly Armored Tanks: Certain early
model Tanks in the game with very thin armor are vul-
nerable to SAFAs by MG platoons. These Tanks are
marked with a " !" in the lower left hand comer. MG
platoons and Vehicles MGs may fire upon such Tanks.
Each MG platoon (and every two Vehicle MGs) may
fire and score a Hit on a roll of 1-4 on a six-sided die.
No other modifiers apply. !fa Hit is scored, roll a sec-
ond six sided die. On a roll of I, the Tank suffers a
Break Down. Roll on theTypeofBreak Down Chart to
determine the severity as usual.
NOTE: All Trucks are printed with the "!" indicator
as well to show they are vulnerable to any type ofSAFA.
whether by MG or infantry platoon. Vehicle MGs.
13.2 Cr ew Served Weapons
All AT, AA, and ART guns must have a unpinned
Crew counter stacked with them in order to fire. Pinned
Crews are unable to fire their weapons. The Crew's
function in the game is to operate the gun.
r----=--:71
13.21 AT Guns: When firing at Vehicles A @ 10
during the Offensive or Defensive Anti- j
Tank Fire Phase c:ach AT gun with a Crew 37mm AT
may fire up to 3 limes at Vehicles up to I0 ..___ __,
hexes away. When AT guns (not AA or ART guns, or
AT rifles) conducts an ATFA and the range is 5 hexes
or less, the die roll is additionally modified by -I . AT
guns may not conduct Barrage Attacks or SAFAs of
any sort.
NOTE: Historically, ATguns were very effective out
to 500 yards.
13.22 ART G uns: When firing at Vehicles A.~0/68
using on map ART guns, they fire exactly
as if they were an AT gun. Each ART gun
with a Crew may fire up to 3 times at en- 75 m Art
emy Vehicles. When conducting an ATFA at a Truck or
AC with an ART gun, add +2 to each roll, in addition to
1 any size modifiers, plus any other modifiers that apply.
ART guns may conduct indirect fire Barrage Attacks.
ART gun belonging to the phasing player could con-
duct both an indirect fire Barrage Attack during the Bar-
rage Phase and then conduct ATFAs during the Defen-
sive Fire Phase (only) during the opposing player's tum.
If it does not fire in the Barrage Phase, it could fire in
the player's Offensive Fire Phase instead.
13.23 AA G uns: AA guns have a special- •~101u
ized capability. Facing restrictions to not
apply to them but otherwise are treated
like AT guns. Thus they have AA capa- 88 m AA
bilities and they may conduct ATFAs in any direction
at Vehicles as well. Each AA gun with a Crew may fire
up to 3 times at Vehicles per Offensive or Defensive
-------1Landshipsi-------
Fire Phase, up to a range of I0 hexes in either case.
They may conduct AA fire at Aircraft as well during
Joint Aircraft Phase. All AA guns are assumed to be
mounted on 360 degree bases. This means they may
fire in any direction at any time and negates the +2 pen-
alty for changing facing during the Defensive Fire Phase
(but not the new target acquisition penalty}. AA guns
may not conduct BarrageAttacksorSAFAs ofany sort.
NOTE: Most AA guns during this period were sim-
ply standard field artillery pieces mounted on special
platforms to allow high angle fire against Aircraft. As
such they were not equipped to engage in Barrage At-
tacks. Purists may wish to allow only the German towed
88mm gun an ATFA capability. All other AA guns may
only engage Aircraft.
13.24 Untrained Unit Fire: AT, AA, and ART guns
alone in a hex without any other friendly units present
may be Eliminated simply by moving an enemy FT or
CT platoon sized unit into the hex. They may also be
captured and used by the opposing player for ATFAs
(only) if all enemy units are forced out of the hex.
Should this occur, add an extra +2 to any To Hit roll in
addition to any other modifiers (to reflect the lack of
training on the weapon). This modification would like-
wise occur if a friendly platoon attempted to use the
WU in place of a Crew (whether absent, Pinned or
forced to Retreat). Thus, only Crews are considered ex-
perienced and trained at firing WUs and any other unit
which fires the WU will have the To Hit roll modified
by +2. This modification is in addition to any others,
i.e. changing targets or facing. This modifier is removed
once a friendly unpinned Crew returns to the WU.
14.0 TLS, FOS AND CREWS
Both sides have a number of unique Soft Target types
that perform specialized functions in the game. Rules
governing their actions are given here.
14.1 General Rule
All units in this section are Soft Target types and are
vulnerable to SAFAs and Barrage Attacks (except TLs}.
14.11 Tank Leaders (TLs): All TLs in Lt. Storey
the game. are men noted for their histori- ~ " Hit" from any MG platoon (or any two Vehicle MGs)
cal prowess while commanding a Tank
1 Nationality
(only). Should theTL's initial Tank suffer ._·_ --"=--'
a Break Down and the TL transfer to another Tank, the
TL effects only that new Tank. TLs have two effects in
the game:
I) The first effect any TL has is when firing the Tank's
main gun. The ATCRT die roll is modified by - I as per
the TL's printed value.
2) Second, the TL may apply his printed - I modifier
to any Initial Tank Break Down, Severity and Repair
die rolls. So a Tank with a TL is less likely to Break
Down and if it does, it is more likely to be only Tempo-
rary damage and if so, Repaired quicker.
a. If the Tank the TL is in is destroyed, so is the TL.
Outside their Tank, TLs behave as normal Soft Target
types moving like other FT units. They have no FS or
WR values but need never need take Morale Checks.
They are immune to "Hits" on the SACRT or BCRT.
They have no effect on Close Assault Combat but if
after resolving Close Assault Combat, no friendly pla-
toons remain but a TL does, the TL is also removed.
TLs may never be used to satisfy a CACRT result.
··~·"' ObH~"' ""~ I F~ I
14.12
as normal Soft Target units and FO•
move like
other FT units. They have no FS or WR A
values. If alone in a hex, they use their ~ 1 "start it up" (otherwise they wait). From then on, the
printed MR of 5. Otherwise, FOs always use the best
MR of any friendly unit they are stacked with.
a. Like other Soft Targets, they are subject to SAFAs
and Barrage Attacks and must make Morale Checks if
a Hit is achieved against them. They have no effect on
Ciose Assault Combat but if after resolving Close As-
sault Combat, no friendly platoons remain but the FO
does, the FO is also removed. FO units may never be
used to satisfy a CACRT result.
14.13 en~' A c- ~"'' w• fuo~ ~~ I
tion in the game is to operate WUs and
certain Vehicle types. They have no FS , This penalty does not apply to MG fire by the Tank.
or WR values by themselves, and have a
1
universal MR of 4. Crews move like normal FT units.
Once set up, Crews may not move non-vehicle mounted
WUs to a new hex. They may however, change the WU's
facing in a hex during the Defensive Anti-Tank Fire
Phase.
a. Like other Soft Targets, they are subject to SAFAs
and Barrage Attacks and must make Morale Checks if
a Hit is achieved against them. They have no effect on
Close Assault Combat but if after resolving Close As-
sault Combat, no friendly platoons remain but the Crew
does, the Crew is also removed. Crews units may never
be used to satisfy a CACRT result.
b. Crews derive no defensive combat benefit from
hiding "behind" their WUs.
14.14 Overrun: TLs, FOs, and Crew units are removed
if they alone occupy a hex and enemy FT or CT pla-
toon units or Vehicles enter the hex. lfthe hex contains
any friendly FT or CT platoon units or Vehicles, they
remain in play.
15.0 SPECIAL GERMAN TANK RULES
Unlike in WWII, the Germans in WWI tended to be
inept when using the tank. In all battles in which the
Germans used tanks to counterattack the British, the
German crew's morale proved a bit too sensitive when
bullets began to ping the metal.
15.11 German Tank Crew Morale: While most Tanks
have no Crew counter per se, whenever German Tanks
are present in a scenario they should have a Crew
counter stacked underneath the Tank. Due to German
Tank Crew sensitivity, if the Tank comes under MG
fire ofany sort (which normally has no effect on Tanks),
the Crew morale may fail. After the Tank receives a
fi ring (see Rule 13.14), make a Morale Check for the
Crew. If the roll is equal to or less than the Crew's MR
(of 4}, there is no effect. The Tank itself can still fire all
ofit's weapons or move with no penalty. If the Crew's
MR is exceeded, the Tank's facing is immediately turned
to face the map edge it entered on (this is a free turn
and must be done immediately) and a second die roll
must be made (see 15.12 below).
15.12 Subsequent Penalties: If the Crew rolls over its
MR. roll the die a second time and interpret the results
as follows:
I) If the second roll is 1-3, the Tank Crew has Bailed
Out. Place a Crew Bailed Out marker on the Tank. Place
a Crew unit in any hex next to the Tank. This Crew
must move toward the nearest cover (defined as terrain
offering a positive die roll modifier against SAFAs or
Barrage Attacks}. After reaching cover, the Crew may
attempt to recover their morale only by rolling a I or 2
during their Pin Recovery Phase. Note that they are not
in " Pinned" status during this time, although they may
be Pinned by subsequent attacks. lfthey do recover their
morale, the Crew may move and even attempt to reoc-
cupy the Tank on subsequent turns. If reoccupied, and
the hex with the Tank is not occupied by enemy units
or has enemy units within two hexes of it, the Crew can
Tank must take the most direct path to exit their friendly
map edge that they entered on (calling it a "day'' so to
speak). No attacks by the Tank can be made.
R-14
2) If the roll of 4 or 5, the Crew hits the floor of the
Tank. In this case, the Tank cannot move for one full
turn. It may fire any weapon, but if firing it's main gun,
add +2 to the To Hit roll, in addition to any other modi-
fiers. This +2 main gun modifier applies any time there-
after during the scenario where the Tank fires it's main
gun, not just the turn the Crew failed its Morale Check.
3) On a 6, there is no effect and the Tank may con-
tinue freely on its mission (after turning back around
of course!)
EXAMPLE: During the Vehicle Movement Phase a
German A7V is rumbling down the road. During the
Defensive Small Arms Fire Phase. the British player
has a MG platoon fire at it (he has to roll a 1-4 on a si:c
sided die to score a Hit). Assume a Hit is scored. The
Tank Crew must malre a Morale Check. Assume they
roll over their MR of 4. The Tank 's facing is immedi-
ately turned to face the map edge to whence it came
from. A second roll of "2" indicates the Crew Bails
Out and is placed in an adjacent hex. The Crew may
move toward cover during the German player's Ist Foot
Troop Movement Phase.
a. If the German Tank has already suffered a Break
Down, it does not rotate in place but the second die roll
is modified by -I.
NOTE: Remember. MGfire against A/lied Tanks, un-
less weaJcly-armored or otherwise stated, never requires
them to take a Morale Checlc.
16.0 OPTIONAL RULES
Optional rules are just that, optional. Both players
must agree to use them beforehand. Some optional rules
highlight a specific fact about the connict, others re-
flect the changing nature of the war more accurately.
16.1 Optional Infantry Rules
Each side's standards for infantry varied widely. The
following rules reflect those differences.
16.111'raining: Infantry platoons were trained to wildly
different standards and doctrines at the start of the Great
War. To reflect this, alter the Weapons Ranges for in-
fantry platoons (only) by nationality using the chart
below.
Weapons Range
British, ANZAC, Canadian 6
All other 4
French 3
Double a unit's FS value at a range of I hex, and
halve it (round down) at ranges over one half the maxi-
mum range listed above.
EXAMPLE: A British infantry platoon with a printed
FSof5 would have a FSof/Oat range one, 5 a/ranges
two and three, and 2 at ranges four through si:c.
EXCEPTION: MG platoons retain their 9 hex range
and double their FS value at range one, using their
printed FS value at all other ranges. CT platoons still
cannotfire while mounted.
a. Infantry skills declined drastically as the war
dragged on. By 1916, most of the professional or highly
trained men were gone. To reflect this, decrease the
Weapon Ranges ofall infantry platoons by one for each
year after 1915 (·I in any scenario taking place in 1916,
-2 in 1917, etc.). No unit may drop below a WR of2
using this rule. MG platoons remain unaffected by this
rule.
b. The British Expeditionary Force in 1914 was
simply one of the best trained armies in history. Play-
ers wishing to simulate this should treat any British
infantry platoon as a 5-6-5 in any 1914 scenario, re-
gardless of its printed values.
16.12 Morale: By 1918, everyone was feeling kind of
war weary about the whole thing and largely just wanted
to survive. To simulate this, in any 1918 scenario, no
 -------1Ulndships!-------
unit may have a MR greater than "4" regardless of what
is printed on the counter except for units specifically
identified as American, German Stosstruppen, or Ca-
nadian/ANZAC troops.
16.13 Rifle Grenades: This rule is best used in con-
junction with 16. 11 above. In scenarios starting in 1917
or later, for every three infantry platoons in the sce-
nario (excluding MG platoons and Crews), each player
may designate one of his platoons as armed with rifle
grenades. These units may only use their rifle grenades
when conducting a SAFA against an adjacent hex re·
gardless of the terrain. The units so designated conduct
SAFAs normally except the result is modified on the
SACRT by .J per each rifle grenade equipped unit par-
ticipating. The modifiers for this rule and any others
are cumulative. When conducting SAFAs at longer
• ranges, the unit uses it's normal FS value and WR when
firing. When resolving the attack, a roll of a unmodified
sg
"I" on the SACRT is assumed to exhaust the grenade
supply of the unit. From then on, it may only use it's
normal FS value.
16.14 MG Options: Some may feel the
Morale Check die roll modifier for ~­
SAFAs by MGs is too destructive but the ~
rule reflects that MGs were more likely
to get a hit and thus kill or pin. If players think the
standard game rules are excessive, do not modify the
Morale Check roll for MG fire.
a. Realistically, at the game's scale MG platoons
could affect more than one hex with their fire. To simu·
late this, allow all MG platoons (but not Vehicle
mounted MGs) to attack up to two adjacent hexes with
their printed Fire Value. Each attack against the two
hexes is resolved separately on the SACRT but the MG
platoon(s) do not receive the -I die roll modifier for
MG fire if they spread their fire over two hexes. The
Morale Check penalty if a Hit is scored remains.
16.15 Stosstruppen: The German solution to the dead-
lock of the trenches was the development of
stosstruppen tactics. This revolutionary approach to
infantry combat emphasized lots of firepower up front,
surprise, speed, rehearsals and bypassing resistance.
Contrary to popular belief, very few units were actu-
ally specially trained stoss units, typically only one bat-
talion per division was fully trained. (Everyone else got
a "quick tips" sheet with the basics printed on it). Play-
ers who wish to experiment with stosstruppen units can
use the following special rules:
a. Increased Fire Value: Stosstruppen units represent
an amalgamation of the older separate infantry and MG
platoons. To reflect this, no stosstruppen MG platoons
are allowed, only infantry platoons. To account for the
large number of automatic weapons in a stoss unit, in-
crease the printed Fire Values of all stosstruppen infan-
try platoons present in any scenario by + I and each
stoss unit qualifies for the -I SACRT fire bonus and+ I
Morale Check bonus granted MG platoons. In addi-
tion, each stoss platoon counts as MG armed in Close
Assault Combat. If playing with Rule 16.11 above, stoss
unit platoons retain their printed WR of6 reflecting the
large number of light machine guns in each unit.
b. Defensive Bonus: To reflect the abandonment of
linear tactics and the emphasis on the squad, rather than
the platoon as the unit of maneuver, all stoss infantry
platoons may claim a +I die roll modifier against all
SAFAs and Barrage Attacks when defending in Clear
terrain, in addition to any others they may be eligible
for. No extra defensive bonus is granted for other ter-
rain types, beyond the standard modi tiers.
c. Infantry Gun Support: In order to provide direct
fire support, stosstruppen were equipped with infantry
guns. These are treated identically like on map ART
guns except they may only engage in direct fire Bar-
rage Attacks (maximum WR of I0 hexes) against all
targets. FOs and Aircraft cannot Observe for them. Un-
like nonnal ART guns, infantry guns stacked with a
Crew unit have a Movement Allowance of I and may
be moved by their Crew counter during the 2nd Foot
Troop Movement Phase.
16.2 Optional Weapons and Terrain Rules
The rules in this section modify some of the basic
game mechanics.
16.21 Changing WU Facing: The restriction on chang-
ing a WU's facing only during the Defensive Fire Phase
reflects that the Crew must also conduct related activi-
ties and adjust gun sightings. If players feel otherwise,
allow WUs to change facing during the I st Foot Troop
Movement Phase also.
16.22 Artillery Restrictions: Historically, before any
battle began, both sides would plan their artillery fire
very rigidly. The flexibility of portable radios and fire
control systems were simply undreamed of. To simu-
late the way it really was, before any scenario begins,
both sides may predesignate their Barrage Attacks (if
any). Players should, before the start of the game, write
down the tum, the target hex, how much, and what type
of barrage and ammo will be used. To avoid Scatter
checks, FOs (or Aircraft) must still be able to observe
the target hex the turn th~ Barrage is scheduled to ar-
rive and be "in communications", otherwise roll for
Scatter. The FOT is not used. Target hexes that are Au-
tomatically Observed (see Rule 5.13) do not require
FOs or Aircraft nor is being "in communications"
checked for. These target hexes can be attacked with-
out FOs (or Aircraft) throughout the game, and just not
on Tum I (see Rule 5.14). Still check for Scatter how-
ever. Basically this represents firing by map at known
target locations.
tUJ o;~, Fin . ., gu<rh< spom;,g ~·~-~
ranges, and direct fire WRs printed on
ART andAA guns, represent what might
be reasonably expected given average 88 AA
undulations in the terrain. If the scenario being played
strikes players are being more flat than normal, double
the Spotting ranges for units in Clear terrain (only) and
double the direct fire WR values printed on ART and
AA guns to 20 hexes. Units which fire are still auto-
matically Spotted no matter what terrain type they are
in provided a LOS exists, but at up to double normal
Spotting range (20 hexes). FO observation ranges
double as well (20 hexes). AT guns retain their maxi-
mum WR of 10.
a. In a similar manner, to show the advantage of el-
evation in the game, extend the direct fire WRs, Spot-
ting and Observation ranges by I 0 hexes for each el-
evation level up the unit is and vice versa.
EXA MPLE: A FO on a level two hill could Observe
any hex he has an LOS to within 30 hexes ofhimself. A
Crew with an ART gun on a level two hill could con-
duct a directfire Barrage Attack against enemy CTunits
in Clear terrain some 29 hexes away (if it has an indi-
rect fire WR ofat least that length).
16.24 Improving the Defenses: Fortification tech-
niques accelerated throughout the war as well. To simu-
late the way troops got better at "digging in", in any
scenario starting in 1916 or later, increase the die roll
modifiers for trenches and strongpoints by one against
SAFAs and BarrageAttack.s. So a Trench hex in a 1917
scenario adds +2 to the SACRT roll, instead of the nor-
mal + I and a Strongpoint would add +3.
NOTE: The value offlamethrowers and other pow-
erful weapons really becomes apparent using this op-
tional rule. Try it!
R - 15
16.3 Optional Vehicle Rules
Optional Vehicle rules add a touch of realism at a
cost of slightly more complexity.
16.31 Poor Tank Designs: The WRs printed on the
Vehicle counters do not represent the maximum range
of the weapon in question ofcourse, but rather an opti-
mal effective maximum range. However, poor internal
layout, widely separated crew stations, inadequate vi-
sion slits, and bad (or no) suspensions would all limita
Vehicle's range at which its weapons could be brought
to bear. To simulate this aspect, reduce the WRs for the
following Vehicle types:
Type Weapons Range
British "Mark Series" I- VJJJ : 7/4
French Schneider: 2/4
French St. Chamond: 6/4
GermanA7V: 815
The number to the left of the slash is the maximum
WR forthe Vehicle's main gun(s), if any. The number
to the right of the slash is the maximum WR for it's
MGs, ifany. Tanks andACs not listed here have a maxi-
mum WR of7 or 5 for any main gun/MG they possess.
a. A TL on board will add one to all main gun ranges.
16.32 Tank Doctrine: Tank doctrines during this pe-
riod required friendly Tanks to end their movement
within three intervening hexes of another friendly Tank
(unless of course, it has suffered a Break Down).
NOTE: Tanks usually operated within a mutually
supporting role ofother Tanks in their platoon/section.
16.4 Optional Aircraft Rules
These rules attempt to highlight the many roles and
features of certain aircraft.
16.41 Fighter Strafe Attacks: Most airmen detested
ground attack duties but were often called upon to do
so in emergencies. To simulate this, allow any F type
aircraft to conduct Strafing Missions in any scenario.
Each such aircraft is assumed to have a Strafe Factor of
2 for this purpose.
16.42 CS A;rt,d< R" <d<H"" Th< ~~ ~
Sopwith Salamander and DH5 CS aircraft · ·
were single seaters so realistically, don't
4 6
allow them to perform the Artillery Ob-
servation Mission during the game. Unlike other CS
types, they may abort their mission and intercept en-
emy aircraft (treat them as an F-types from that point
on). The Bristol Fighter CS-type may also opt at any
point to act as an F-type.
::""I
16.43&mb<•O.r~•~F;re,M"I<;~- ~ ~
gine B type aircraft were usually well ~
armed. To reflect this allow all B type air- J.J.
craft to return fire once at each anack.ing 6
F type (i.e. the B type may fire at all enemy aircraft in
its hex, but only once at each) using the 2-4 column on
theSACRT.
16.44 Superior German Armament: German aircraft
were usually better armed throughout the warthen their
opponents. To reflect this, in any scenario taking place
before July, 1917, Allied F type aircraft must fire on
the 2-4 column of the SACRT. German F types con-
tinue to use the 5-8 column. In July 1917 onwards, Al-
lied F types may use the 5-8 column too.
16.5 Additional Units
Units with a""" printed on them are not used in the
scenarios provided in this game. Rules and scenarios
for their use will become available in the Clash ofArms
newsletter. Be sure to send in the game's feedback card!
AI:~ I~ 9A, il1~
~~~~rm u <!>
m
·1
416 .'1' n -1
• 314
-1 :
• 25
-------1Landshipsi-------
t7.o IDSTORICAL COMMENTARYbyPenyA.Moore
I. The Evolution of the Tank
II was of all people, the Italians, who first proposed
a war vehicle. A Guido del Vigevano ventured in 1335
that a wheeled design, propelled by the wind was fea-
sible. Later, in 1472, Robeno Valturio proposed a rect-
angular box supponed on four wheels and driven by
wind vanes on each side. This idea was workable on
paper except for the cooperation of the wind. But it
was Leonardo da Vinci's "baffle machine" which con-
tained ideas continued in use today. He introduced the
concept of all round protection for the crew, the use of
gunpowder and a selfcontained propulsion system (men
operating cranks to drive the wheels by gearing). Even
the shape of this early machine used sloped armor in a
highly angular fashion, which would defect cannon-
balls quite well. The shape of this tank was akin to a
flying saucer.
Time went on with little funher concern for armor
vehicles until the Holt Tractor Company of Stockton,
California, produced the first steam driven tractor with
caterpillar tracks in I 883. llowever, a steam engine is
very cumbersome and it was Gottlieb Daimler in I 885
who designed the first internal combustion engine. The
first marriage of this new engine and a weapon was in
1898. A Mr. Simms produced a De Dion Bouton
Quadeycle armed with a Maxim machine gun. The only
problem with this was that the machine gun required
all the dnver's strength to aim, let alone to steer the
cycle. II is idea was an excellent method of moving a
\\capon however. Also in that year, a Major Davidson
of the Naval Academy at Lake Geneva in America pro-
duced the first car which carried a Colt potato-digger
machine gun. The Duryea car had three wheels and the
co-driver could fire the MG while on the move since it
was mounted on its own tripod. Two other men were
also carried so when the car stopped they could dis-
mount and redeploy. However, the U.S. War Depan-
ment did not seem to care.
II was in England in 1900 that the idea of armor pro-
tection was raised. A Mr. Pennington proposed an ar-
mor protected car to carry two shielded Maxim ma-
chine guns. This idea was dropped, but in 1902, a Mr.
Simms again produced the "war car". The engine was
protected by armor and the superstructure was open
topped with mounted guns in swivel mountings. Five
men operated the car: the driver was in the middle, two
men operated the Maxim I pdr. cannon at one end and
two manned the Maxim machine gun at the opposite
Being a member of a tank crew in WWI quickly ex-
hausted everyone inside within a shon period of time
due to the internal working environment. Why was this
so? After all, by today's standards, the early tanks pro-
vided a large amount of internal space. So much so the
British Mark series had an eight man crew (the Ger-
man A7V would average 18-22 men inside!). Of the
eight men, only four were gunners, the others were the
commander, driver and two gearsmen. The engine it-
selfin the Mark series stood upright in the forward half
of the floor wllh the gearbox behind it. To change gears,
tht. gearsmen would physically shove their hands in-
side the gearbox and replace them. Safety features were
negligible. Once moving, the engine quickly heated up
British Marie V m11lt
end. The armor was 6mrn, the car was 28 ft. long and
speed was around 9 mph. Again, the military expressed
no interest and it was scrapped. In this same year, the
Russians contracted with a French firm to produce an
armored car. The car built by Girarot et Voigt Com-
pany, had an 16hp engine. The driver cupola was pro-
tected and it was armed with two Hotchkiss 8mrn ma-
chine guns. The Russians did not like the what was pro-
duced so the car was sold to the French Army and used
with success in Morocco 1902.
However, it was a Russian design for an armored
car which all future designs would follow. In 1902, the
Russian military sent their specifications to the Charron
Company and ordered 36 machines. This car was four
wheeled box of steel plate with a revolving turret on
the roof in which a Maxim machine gun sat. Steel racks
were placed above the wheels to allow a bridge to be
thrown across ditches. The car was known as the
"Charron" and weighed three tons and propelled by a
30 hp engine. The car was finally shipped to Russian in
1904 and used during the St. Petersburg riots. Only a
few were made because for some reason the Russian
canceled the contract. Following in the same vein was
the Austrian armored car produced by Austro-Daimler
in 1906. The US Chief of Staff, General Miles, pro-
posed convening five cavalry regiments to armored cars
in 1905. The opposition was so loud he later withdrew
his idea.
As the airplane came into being, the armor car took
another evolutionary step in 1909, when two German
gunmakers showed their first antiaircraft gun. The Ger-
man firm, Rheinische Metallwaren of Dusseldorf, pro-
duced the Erhardt 50mm quick firing gun mounted on
an armored car and the Krupp firm, of Essen, displayed
their 75mm high angle gun encased in an armor circu-
lar shield. The gun was mounted on the back of an ar-
mored truck.
The first tracked gun carriage plan using the Holt
Caterpillar was drawn up by an Austrian officer, a Lt.
Gunther Bursryn. This was in 1911 , when he submit-
ted his plans to theAustrian War Dcpanment. After three
months, the depanment returned them with the com-
ment of"it's a clever idea" and suggested he built one.
Instead, he sent the plans to the German War Depan-
ment and the General Staff where he was turned down.
In Australia, an engineer, De Mole, created a tracked
vehicle with a sprung suspension. The steering was light
years ahead since the tracked vehicle was steered by
INSIDE THE TANK ENVIRONMENT
making the internal air temperature rise to 90 degrees
or more. The engine was smoky and fumes caused eyes
to sting and water. (Curiously, the engine was found to
run best on fuel made from a panicular oilfield in
Borneo which had a high content of aromatics in it.)
There was no forced ventilation and fresh air simply
crept through the several gaps in the fittings. Reading
this one wonders how "bullet proor' some ofthese early
tanks were.
The inside of a tank was dark. No interior lights were
provided and only sunlight penetrating the driving and
gunner slits relieved the gloom. Some light was pro-
vided by the engine glowing from its heat, first red, the
white hot. The noise was indescribable and made nor-
mal voice communication impossible. Hand signals had
to be used. (Strangely enough, a tank could move to
within 250 yards of the enemy lines without producing
enough noise to be noticed). In the British Mark series
of tanks, the only two men in the tank who knew where
they were moving were the driver and commander. If
the commander wanted a gunner to engage a panicular
target, he would have to physically move down to the
gunner and point it out to him.
R- 16
"bowing" the track with the lead wheels. He submitted
the plans to the War Office in London where it was
quickly turned down. (The design was later copied by
the Landships Committee and in 1919, he would re-
ceive an award for inventing the steering approach).
It is interesting to note that in the binh of the tracked
vehicle all major powers initially turned it down. Aus-
tria, Germany, America and England all thought tracked
vehicles were "nice ideas". Yet in each case, that major
power would end up turning to the Landship tank to
achieve the decisive breakthrough.
II. The Tank Comes of Maturity
By January 1915, the trench deadlock had set in. In
that same month a memorandum from the desk of one
Winston Churchill, who was in charge of the Royal
Naval Air Service and which operated an armored car
squadron in France called auention to the idea of a
landship "to cross withering fire and crush wire".
Churchill went on to state that 40 to 50 of these ma-
chines could advance in the face ofenemy fire and cross
the trenches. The memo went to Lord Kitchner, the Sec-
retary of State and was promptly tabled. Churchill pro-
ceeded anyway and formed a commiuee to investigate.
After seeing a tractor demonstration a month later, so
impressed was he that he ordered 15 armored cars to
be fitted with tracks. The idea then passed through the
Landships Comrniuee where the first actual modem
tank was drawn up. The armored box was to be 38 ft.
long, 12.6 ft. wide and I0.6 ft. high. On top was a tur-
ret armed with a 12 pdr. gun. The tank would have
weighed 28 tons. This was not the only design, Com-
mander Hetherington of the Naval Car Squadron sub-
mitted a plan for a monster tank. This tank had three
gigantic wheels each 4 ft. in diameter, three 4 inch guns
in each turret and the tank was I00 ft. long. The engine
was from a submarine and top speed was 4 mph. A
prototype was built and once completed it was realized
that it would never work.
In May 1915, the Killen Strait armored tractor car
was demonstrated. This machine was built in America
in Chicago and consisted of three tractor mounts in a
tricycle format and was quite useless in crushing wire
or crossing trenches. It did prove that it could be done.
Also at this time was another shipment from America,
the Creeping Grip tractor by Bullock Company. When
they arrived in England they were taken apan and told
to expand the track size.
In terms of performance, all tanks had to stop be-
fore the tank could make a tum or even fire effectively.
Most tanks had severe difficulties in negotiating very
soft ground and could not enter a wooded area, swamps
or cross streams. While tanks were thought nominally
immune to small arms fire, bullets hining the tank could
either liquidfy from the impact and spray hot lead
through chinks in the armor or cause spalling of the
interior armor plate. Either case was just as fatal. Crews
were issued chain mesh face masks to avoid such inju-
ries. Most found them so uncomfonable they left them
off and simply took their chances.
So while a tank could remain in continuous action
for a maximum ofeight hours, this was seldom done as
the crew had met its physical limit much sooner. In fact,
any tank that travelled more than 20 miles without
breaking down performed both a significant feat and
signalled the presence of a well-trained crew. As al-
ways, the success or failure of a tank was governed
more by the men inside the machine, than by the equip-
ment itself.
 -------1Landshipsi-------
It was not until September 6th, 1915, that the first
actual tank prototype that resembled the majority of
WWJ tanks carne into existence. This was the Lincoln
No. I or "Little Willie" designed by William Tritton
and U . Wilson of the Landships Committee. It was a
metal rectangle perched on the American Holt tractor
with a turret consisting of a 2 pdr. gun. It also had nu-
merous firing ports. The I 05 hp engine gave it a speed
of2 mph and the tracks were beneath the sides of the
superstructure. During the tests, it was found that the
metal tracks were too soft and came off the rollers, and
that the wheelbase of 4 ft. was too short. A month later,
a wooden mock-up called the Centipede was shown.
This would carry a 6 pdr. gun and five light machine
guns. The Centipede had its debut as a real object on
January 12th, 1916 at Hatfield Park under great secrecy.
The park had been turned into a replica of the front
lines, replete with streams, shellholes, trenches and
wire. The Centipede successfully negotiated all the ob-
stacles. Next in the line to debut was prototype of the
Mk I, named "Big Willie". It's shape was rhomboidal
and was 31 ft. long, 3.8 ft. wide and 8 ft. high, weigh-
ing 31 tons. Armor plating around IOmm thick pro-
tected the front and sides. The tank was armed with
two long-barreled 6 pdr. guns, one on each side. For
ammo, there were two shell types, explosive and later,
case shot. This case shot was very effective as an anti-
personnel weapon. The I05 hp engine had two gears,
and as far as the steering went, it took 60 yards to make
a circle!
Nevertheless the Mk I was deemed a success and
the British High Command ordered some I00 tanks.
Two types were to be built, a male version with two 6
pdr. and four machine guns, and a female version armed
with only six machine guns. So, finally the landship
was a military reality. The various "Mark" series of
tanks could all move I00-120 yards a minute on flat
clear ground, over trenches this rate decreased to 30-
40 yards and while moving at night it dropped to 15
yards a minute. (As a curious aside, because the first
"landships" were sponsored by the Admiralty Board,
and not the army, tanks today possess "decks" and
"hatches" and not "hoods" and "doors"!)
The first tank section of six tanks arrived in France
on August 14th, 1916 at Yvrench, near Abbeville. The
tanks were not hidden from view but quite the oppo-
site. Instead of the crews practicing their skills, every
day between 9am-l Oam and 2pm-3pm the tanks wou.ld
be paraded around in a carnival fashion as an amuse-
ment for the troops! So much for secrecy.
While the British were working on their landships,
the French Schneider company in May 1915, experi-
mentally obtained two Holt tractors and encased them
in armor creating an unarmed "tank" so to speak. The
French Secretary of Inventions, J. M. Breton, had been
trying to promote his own design - a circular saw car-
rier to cut barbed wire so the Schneider firm mounted
these in front. It was not a success and ultimately, the
Secretary of Inventions thought the whole idea unnec-
essary. Instead, it was an artillery officer, Colonel
Estienne, who got the tank idea going in France. He
first proposed that armored troop carriers towed by self
propelled tractors be used to effect a breakthrough in a
memorandum to General Joffie (the supreme French
commander) in December 1915. These carriers were
to be 13 ft. long and weigh 13 tons and were armored
plated. Each had two machine guns and a 37mm can-
non and able to move at 5.5 mph. More importantly
they were able to cross a 6.5 ft. trench. Estienne's idea
was revolutionary in that he proposed to carry 20 men
in each which would dismount behind enemy lines af-
ter crossing the trenches. Joffre was impressed and ap-
proved of the idea and authorization to begin construc-
tion was given. Estienne first went to the car company,
Renault, which showed no interest in the project.
TANK TACTICS
After actually building a tank, the next problem en-
countered was how to use them. After much growth in
the size of the Tank Corps and some experimentation,
the British settled on a tank battalion as the basic tank
unit. There were 26 of them by the time the war ended.
A tank battalion consisted ofsix companies of25 tanks
each, subdivided into sections of 5 or 6 tanks each, with
one headquarters company. Overall the unit had 184
officers and I ,610 men.
The "standard" drill developed for using tanks was
in place by the time ofCambrai and tried to follow the
sequence below:
I. Half a tank battalion would be used in the initial
assault. The advance tanks in each section would crush
the outpost wire, creating a gap and then swing left to
rake the first trenchline with their main guns and MGs.
2. This would then be followed by a second tank in
each section which would drop a fascine (a bridge-like
thing about 4.5 fl. wide) and cross the trenchline while
firing it's guns.
3. The last tank of a section would pass over the
fascine, crush the second wire barrier and pour fire into
the second trench line. The rest ofthe tank section would
follow close behind and suppress enemy units in the
second trench, drop fascines, and cross the trench.
4. All tanks of the section would then regroup (at a
predesignated objective).
5. Infantry units, usually consisting of four platoons
per tank section, would then follow to clear out the
trench lines working from right to left and further aided
by one or two tanks.
6. More infantry units would follow to secure the
trenches (again, four platoons per tank section), set up
blocks and increase the gaps in the wire so the reserves
could pass through.
7. Once all this happened, a half of a tank battalion
would follow any troops that broke through to support
and exploit.
In general terms, there was a tank deployed every
300 yards depending on the battlefield environment.
Usually, the initial assault force was I00 yards and 4
minutes ahead of the main body of tanks, the infantry
support platoons would follow in two columns some
25-50 yds. behind the main body of tanks.
The French pioneer, Col. Estienne originally envi-
sioned using towed, armored personnel carriers to cross
no-mans-land and have the troops debark in the rear of
the enemy. Thankfully this idea was never tried. With
the creation of tanks the next French idea was to use
large numbers of them in 1917 to stage surprise mass
assaults and break through the trenches. Around half
of them would then continue on to exploit while the
rest would hang around to suppress any pesky German
infantry that remained.
Tactically, this idea wasn't bad. But much to French
annoyance, the element of surprise was lost by the pre-
mature commitment of British tanks at the Somme in
Sept. 1916. As a consequence, the Germans promptly
widened and deepened their trenches. As neither the
Schneider or St. Chamond was any great trench crosser
to begin with, the French tanks were now even worse
off. The debacle at Chemin des Dames took the offen-
sive steam out of the French for the rest of the year so
their tanks had little to do.
Eventually the French carne up with the idea of us-
ing them for close support. The tanks would directly
suppress iflfantry strongpoints and resistance with their
RenauiJ FT-17 (MG)
R- 17
big 75mm guns, sort of a WWJ "sturmgeschutze" So
orgaruzationally, tanks were formed like artillery units,
either a groupe of 16 vehicles, or subdivided into bat-
teries of4 vehicles. Tactically this meant the formation
could operate as independent balleries or the overall
commander could form a massive artillery concentra-
tion by taking control of the entire groupe. Three
Schneider or four St. Chamond groupes became a
groupement, to which were attached regular supply and
repair units. These groupements were given permanent
unit numbers (a Roman numeral) and were parceled
out to Army Groups North and East. Under this scheme
of employment, the big French tanks spent much of the
next 18 months leading counterattacks against German
breakthroughs.
Renault FT-17 equipped units were organized dif-
ferently. From the start it was planned for large num-
bers of these tanks to be produced. To accommodate
these plans the French formed Bat/a/ions des Chars
Legers (BCLs) of tanks, some 75 strong. Each battal-
ion was composed of three companies, each with 25
FT-17s. Each company had a headquarters tank (a TSF
model) and three sections of five tanks each (3 cannon
armed and 2 w1th MGs) plus a reserve section of5 tanks
and a recovery unit with 3 tanks. Eventually the flood
of FT-17s being produced required even larger organi-
zations so Regiments D 'Artillerie Speciale (RAS) were
formed from three BCLs. Wartime experiences quickly
led to the decision to strip the companies of their re-
serve tank section and grouping them all together as a
spare, "ad hoc" company under central control of the
battalion. The idea behind the Renault was massive
numbers. The enemy would be presented with a swarm
of small bees that would dominate the battlefield. The
Renault was very good at this and the increasing loss
ofGerman strongpoints to Renault assaults in latter half
of 1918 led the Germans to issue a specification for a
FT-17 tank hunter (which eventually became the LK
II).
The essential difference between the British and
French approach to tank doctrine was that with heavier
tanks but fewer troops, Brillsh doctrine called for the
tanks to lead the way and attempt to crush everything
in their path, having the infantry mop up. The French,
with lighter tanks and more men, had their tanks fol-
low behind the leading wave of infantry to deal with
any strongpointslobstacles encountered.
The Germans, having few tanks to begin with, fielded
a fairly simple organization. The A7V tanks were
formed into Sturmpanzerkraftwagen Abteilungs (As-
sault Tank Detachments) of about 5 tanks each, num-
bered ATD I, 2 and 3 respectively. Due to breakdowns,
losses, etc., it was a rare abteilungthat had it's full com-
pliment after any action. Captured Allied Mk IV. tanks
were similarly organized into ATDs, numbered II
through 16, each with a mix of male and female tanks.
German tactics envisioned using tanks strictly as in-
fantry support weapons and only in conjunction with
infantry. One annoying complaint soon surfaced while
using captured Allied tanks, they were too slow to keep.
up with the fast-moving Stosstruppen infantry! Tanks
were quickly withdrawn from the battlefield as soon as
the immediate objective was taken. Thoughts ofbreak-
through and encirclement by tanks would await the ef-
forts of a certain young captain named Heinz Guderian
in the next war.
RenauiJ FT-17 (TFS)
-------1Landships!--------
GERMAN INNOVATIONS
While the Allies were light years ahead of the Ger-
mans in tank interest and production, it was the Ger-
mans who would be years ahead of the Allies in practi-
cally every other type of weapon.
Poison gas was first used by the Germans. The first
developments of the gas weapon occurred in October
1914, in the Kaiser Wilhelm Institute in Berlin. Due to
the shortage of steel, the German Anny had requested
an artillery shell made of cast iron which was weaker
than the steel shell. Since the shell had to be much
thicker this would give less internal space for an explo-
sive charge, in fact, the space was so small upon deto-
nation tt simply cracked the shell. Thus, the Germans
needed to fill the shell with another substance. At first,
the Germans tried filling the shell with irritants (partly
to avoid violating the Hague Convention which forbade
poison gasses, but not those with short term effects).
These were first used at Neuve Chapelle on October
27th, 1914. The shell did little and General Falkenhayn's
bet ofa case of champagne that he could remain inside
the gas cloud for five minutes proved his point.
A new shell with teargas was then produced and used
on a wide scale against the Russians at Bolymov (near
Lodz) on January 31st, 1915. The German troops were
given a simple mask consisting of a pad of cotton that
tied in the front of the nose and mouth with tapes. It
was moistened with a chemical solution. After the Ger-
mans had barraged the Russians with the new weapon
they advanced. It was expected that the going would be
easy. However, the Russians fought as if nothing new
had hit them. The gas had done little. The gas was un-
suited for the subzero weather and the tear gas droplets
failed to evaporate and instead froze. The Germans lost
20,000 men.
Experiments continued. By April 1915, the German
were able to release a hideous green cloud from cylin-
ders (avoiding the Hague Convention prohibition
against poisonous gas-filled projectiles!) upon the
French colonial troops near Ypres. It left a four mile
wide gap in the lines, several miles deep, devoid oflife.
Perhaps because the attack had been thought of as one
with limited objectives, the German troops were too
timid to exploit their unexpected success. From that
day onward both sides raced to develop and use more
deadly gasses (phosgene, chlorine, and mustard gas),
more effective gas masks, and better delivery systems
(Livens projectors and artillery shells).
Next, the Germans introduced flamethrowers to sup-
port infantry assaults. It was a German, Richard Fiedler,
a Berlin engineer who designed the first flamethrower
as a weapon m 1900. It was first tested in 1901. He
produced two types, a one man held version which had
a range of20 yards and the larger canister type requir-
ing a small crew which had a range of 40 yards and
could shoot a flame for 40 seconds. Both types pro-
duced a large amount of smoke and the whole effect
lasted for two minutes.
German A7V-U
rF~·.
.. · ~j'Q.::
. 1 . ·~~~·::......... i
. -i·: :··:
The Germans formed the first flamewaffen unit in
1912. This was the 3rd Guards Pioneer Regiment and
consisted of 12 flamethrower companies under the com-
mand of Major Redderman. It consisted of Battalions
23, 24 and 25. It was first used at Hooge, which scared
and shocked the British soldiers into a rout in July, 1915.
After the success at Hooge, flamethrowers were widely
used as trench clearers and in reducing strongpoints.
Improvements in design resulted in man-portable mod-
els, but a flamethrower man remained very vulnerable
to any sort of bullet or shell fire.
After the Allied forces had introduced the tank to
the battlefield, the Germans produced the first antitank
weapons. The first of these was simply a special am-
munition for rifles known as "K" bullets. It was heavier
than a normal bullet with a tungsten-carbide core. Origi-
nally, it was issued to units which sniped at metal en-
closed enemy strongpoints since it was accurate up to
800 yards. At closer ranges it could penetrate the ar-
mor plating of the Mk I and II tanks. But the Germans
had no idea of this until April I lth, 1917, when two
Mk II tanks were captured and the bullet holes were
found. From then on, all Gennan infantry were issued
5 rounds of "K" and machine gunners were given a
whole belt. When the Allies introduced the Mk IV tank
with thicker armor in June 1917, the K bullet was ob-
solete. This forced the Germans to design the first pur-
pose built antitank rifle. This rifle weighed in at 35 lbs,
the barrel alone was 4.3 feet long with a muzzle veloc-
ity of2200 ftlsecond. It had an effective range of 120
yards and shell was 13mm caliber. Produced by Mauser,
the rifle required a small tripod to fire it. The troops
hated it due to it's strong recoil upon firing. But at 120
yards, it could penetrate even a Mk IV's armor plate if
it struck at a right angle. If the bullet struck at a 45
degree angle it would not penetrate, even at 60 yards.
The solution to the spotty effectiveness of the anti-
tank rifle was to enlarge it. This took the form ofa 37mm
gun produced by Rheinmetall which weighed 385 lbs.
in a firing position which included 24 roundsofarnmo.
In it's limbered state, it weighed 1,020 lbs. Each shell
weighed I lb. and the barrel length was 21.5 calibers.
Muzzle veloctty was 1124 ft./sec. with a maximum
range of 2,866 yards. Elevation was -6 to ~ 9 degrees
and traverse to either side was 21 degrees. It required a
crew of three. Basically, the aimer would sit behind the
gun and aim through two sites perched on the barrel.
According to reports, the gun was very effective up to
500 yards and less accurate between 500- 1,000 yards.
Since the suppressive fire of tank machine guns was
limited to about 400 yards, the antitank gun could open
fire at the longer ranges without fear of the tank open-
ing up it's machine guns.
Finally, local artillery guns using direct fire were very
destructive as antitank weapons. Probably most tanks
lost were due to these weapons. But it took a brave
artilleryman to go up against tanks and many of them
paid a steep price for their courage.
R- 18
He then went to Schneider where he found out they
had been working on something similar (the armor en-
cased Holt tractors above) but was more like a tank to
begin with. Joffre liked the idea of these "tanks" so
much he convinced General Headquarters to order some
400 of them in January 1916!
The first Schneider prototypes were completed and
evaluated on February 26th, 1916. When the French
Army Technical Services saw the Schneider and how
they had been bypassed by Col. Estienne, jealousy set
in. They then began designing what would ultimately
become the St. Chamond tank. They contracted for the
St. Chamond firm to build this design, a totally differ-
ent tank. Meanwhile, the French High Command was
led to believe that both firms were building the same
model tank!
The Schneider tank which would finally enter upon
the battlefield had a short barreled 75mm howitzer in
the right front of the hull and a Hotchkiss MG on the
left. The gun had a limited fire arc of ahead and about
20 degrees to the right. Crewed by six men, the tank
was 19.8 ft. long and weighed 14.6 tons with a speed
of 3.7 mph. Armor was barely adequate at around
II.Smm.The St. Chamond tank was bigger (25 ft. long)
and heavier (25 .5 tons) armed with a long barreled
75mm field gun and four MGs. The armor was thicker
than the Schneider, around 17mm. It required a crew
of nine. Each track had a motor coupled with an elec-
tric steering drive which made it both fast (5.3 mph)
and easy to maneuver, but overall the design had con-
siderable overhang in the front. It also broke down very
easy. Around 400 St. Chamonds were produced but by
the end of the war the French only had 72 left (several
were sold to the Lithuanians after the war). Both tanks
were poor trench crossers (the French did not ofcourse
call them landships or tanks, but instead "Artillerie
d'Assaut'' or "Chars d'Assaut'').
After these two limited starts, the French went on to
produce the most successful of all tank designs, the
Renault FT-17. This tank inspired all future tanks by
it's simplicity, and no less than six variants existed de-
pending on the country which had it. The first proto-
type Renault tank appeared in November 1916. It was
a two man, 6 ton tank. It's length was 13.5 ft with a
sprung suspension and a revolving turret armed with a
Hotchkiss MG. It had a speed of 6 mph which was fast
for its day. The beauty ofit's design lay in its ease to
manufacture. French industry could build five FT-17s
for every Schneider or St. Chamond. It was small
enough to maneuver places the big tanks could not and
it was not a large target. It still wasn't a great trench
crosser however, barely able to handle a 6ft. gap. Ea.rly
on the French realized the importance of cannons and
over half the FT-17s produced were armed with a 37mm
gun. Finally, the French upgunned the Renault with a
short 75mm howitzer and simply christened it "BS".
Another version, the TSF, was an unarmed command
version equipped with a radio. All in all, over 3600 were
made and it was widely used by other armies. The
Americans called their Renaults the M1917, the Sovi-
ets called theirs the Lenin tan.k, and the Italians called
theirs the Fiat 3000. Yet bureaucracy and dithering kept
this successful design from appearing on the battlefield
until June 1918.
As the British and the French were advancing the
efforts oftank design, a German engineer named Gobel
had produced a small machine in 1914. The machine
did have the capability to cross over rough terrain but
got stuck in wire. It was powered by a 4 hp engine and
used six spiked rails connected to elliptical wheels so
that fou.r of the six rails were always touching the
ground. The German War Department thought little of
il The heads of the German Army, Hindenburg and
Ludendorf, were not impressed with the poor perfor-
mance ofthe early Allied tanks but despite this, ordered
-------1Landships!-------
the General War Department 7, Vehicle Division to be-
gin development. The first A7V prototype was produced
by lng. Vollmer in the Spring of 1917. It used two sepa-
rate sets of tracks and failed totally. The German High
Command was even more disgruntled. The newer A7V
came to be on May 14, 1917, when it was shown at
Mainz. It was armed with one 57mm gun of Belgian
make and six Maxim machine guns and powered by
two I00 hp engines. It had a crew of 18. Because the
German High Command had never thought highly of
the tank as a viable weapon few resources were given
to produce it and only 20 actually were. Only after the
British demonstrated the potential of the tank at
Cambrai, Nov. 1917 were tanks to become a priority
with the Germans. Still it seems, they were thought of
as a counter to an Allied tank attack, not as a break-
through weapon in and of themselves. The first few
were actually available to the troops in late 1917, how-
ever, they were first used in 191 8.TheA7V tank was in
fac~ and unknown to the Germans, the best of the WWI
tank designs given some modifications. The tracks were
concealed under the hull, the suspension was sprung
and each track was independently driven. The design
had a top speed of8 mph. Its faults lay in having a "low
nose" and poor ground clearance. It was not a good
trench crosser and could tip over on uneven ground.
Yet by the end of the war, reliability had increased to
the point where an A7V could undertake a 50 krn ap-
proach march to the battlefield and attack for up to an-
other 20 krn before "calling it a day."
Italy, as previously noted, had always possessed an
interest in the tank. Thus, the Fiat Company began to
design them in 1916. The Fiat Carro Armato 2000 was
quite advanced by any standard. It was a 40 ton ma-
chine powered by a 240 hp motor and armed with a
37mm gun and six well placed machine guns. It had a
crew of 10 men and it's armor was 15mm to 20mm
thick. The tracks were very low and partly concealed
and the turret revolved. It had a speed of 4.5 mph. The
first demonstration of the tank was held in June 1917.
Yet the Italian Army showed little interest in their home-
grown tank and the four tanks made were never used.
The strange thing was that the Italian Army was inter-
ested in ordering many ofthe French tanks, which were
actually inferior in design. By the Fall of 1917, the army
had placed an order for I00 Renaults and 20 Schneiders.
Upon receiving the Renault tanks, the Italians rede-
signed them in part and renamed them the Fiat 3000.
The main difference being the revolving turret possess-
ing two machine guns. AboutiOO of these were made.
Not yet noted were the American tank designs. One
tank design was quite unique, the Skeleton Tank de-
signed by the Pioneer Tractor Company. This tank had
a tubular frame and was 25 ft. long. Within the frame
sat an armored box for two men and a machine gun.
Powered by two 50 hp engines, it weighed only 9 tons.
Only a prototype was built because it was doubted
whether the tubular frame made of malleable iron pipe
fitted with standard plumbers connectors could survive.
The only other American tank was the two man Ford
three ton tank. It was designed by the US Army and
used many of the same components that the Ford car
did. It was powered by two Model T Ford engines and
had one transmission for each track which gave it a
speed of8 mph. Like most tanks, it only had one ma-
chine gun. Ford estimated that the cost per unit would
only be $4,000 each. The Army, naturally ordered
15,000 of them, but only 15 were made by the end of
the war. Ofthe fifteen, ten were actually used in France.
During the years 1916-18, the British Mark series
continued to be improved and refined which accounts
fora Mk 11, Mk III, Mk IV, MkV and MkVI (never got
beyond drawings). The Mk II was largely the same as
the Mk I but primarily conceived as a training tank.
Thus it was made of milder steel (known as
THE EVOLUTION OF ARTILLERY TACfiCS IN THE GREAT WAR
Artillery, the true Grim Reaper of the First World Missions
War, dealt even more death and destruction than the The m1ss1ons and importance of the artillery in-
machine gun. Rapid fire artillery ruled the battlefield. creased dramallcally as the war progressed. Prepara-
It accounted for at least 58% of the millions of casual- tory barrages became a necessary part of maJor assaults
ties. The destructive power of the guns forced armies to reduce the enemy defenses. Heavy and medium how-
to dig into the earth for protection. Ironically the artil- itzers pulvenzed enemy trenches and concrete fortifi-
lery of the Great War, a key instigator of trench war- cations while suppressing enemy artillery with counter-
fare, ultimately helped end the stalemate ofthe trenches. battery fire. Light field guns and howitzers performed
jobs like wire-cutting and rolling barrages that required
Org•nlzatlon
Artillery was typically separated into two major or- close communication with the infantry. These light field
ganizations: Field Artillery and Foot Artillery. In the pieces also delivered most of the poison gas shells in
German Army, field artillery included light 77mm field the war. Light field guns later tried the vital antitank
guns and light I05mm howitzers. One brigade of field role. Forward observers on the ground and artillery co-
artillery, comprising about 72 weapons, was attached operation aircraft spotted for the artillery. The British
to each infantry division. The foot artillery was made developed sophisticated flash and sound ranging tech-
up of large 150mm and 21 Omm howitzers, with a bat- niq:~es to triangulate enemy batteries.
Drumfire barrages could last for days, the heavy guns
talion of each attached to every army corps. The foot
artillery gave heavy support to the troops during as- churning up the defenses and weeding the enemy from
their deep subterranean dugouts. A short paralyzing hur-
saults.
ricane barrage immediately preceded the infantry as-
Numerous minor organizations of the artillery also
took part in the war. Horse artillery batteries attached sault. The timing of the barrage was crucial. Its dura-
to the cavalry divisions used light field guns. Siege bat- tion had to be long enough to bury the barbed wire and
teries assembled for attacks on fortifications, e.g. the destroy the defenses or the infantry would be hung up
420mm Big Berthas at Liege. Mountain troops required as soon as they went over-the-top. German Colonel
specialized units containing mountain guns which broke Georg "Breakthrough" Bruchmuller brought back the
down into sections for transport by mules. As the war element of surprise in 1917 by skipping preliminary
progressed the number of artillery units increased five ranging and preparatory barrages and going directly to
times. The new units employed captured pieces, con- massive but brief hurricane barrages. The French in-
verted naval guns, obsolescent pieces drafted into ser- troduced the "creeping barrage." ln this successful tech-
vice for the static trench war, as well as new artillery nique the barrage would step forward at a constant rate
weapons. The typical battery was reduced during the and the infantry would follow behind the wall of fire
and destruction. The only problem was that the defend-
war from six to four guns for finer tactical control.
ers were often more resilient than planned, and the bar-
Equipment rage would walk too far ahead.
The armies ofWWI used a wide variety of artillery Throughout the war, the artillery and infantry
types. Three standard classifications are: guns, howit- struggled to develop better tactical communication. The
zers, and mortars. Within each class there are three sizes timing of the barrage had to be perfectly coordinated
relative to shell weight: light, medium, and heavy. Guns with the infantry line commanders' assault plans. Pre-
are relatively long barreled weapons with low eleva- determined schedules collapsed in the reality of com-
tion capability. They fire shells in a "flat" trajectory. bat. The infantry went over-the-top on queue, but then
Light horse drawn guns include the French 75, the Ger- were effectively on their own. Carrier pigeons and field
man 77mm, the Russian 76.2mm, and the British IS- telephones were instrumental, but could be lost or bro-
pounder (84mm); while, heavy guns include the 340mm ken in the first grueling minutes of hand to hand com-
French railroad mounted guns and the German long bat The German Stoss tactics developed complex
range (88 mile range) "Paris Gun." Howitzers have rocket flare signals so that the infantry could control
shorter barrels and higher elevation than guns. They the rate of the creeping barrages. Overhead observa-
fire high explosive shells over obstacles and hit targets
tion aircraft were vital to communication during the
protected behind hills or woods. Howitzers were the advance. The armies finall y broke the deadlock of the
most useful and prolific kind of weapon in WWI trench trenches with better communication and tactical coop-
warfare. Mortars have stubby barrels, fire at a high eration between the infantry and the artillery. True real
angle, and their shells drop nearly vertically on their time cooperation between the artillery and other arms
target. Mortars have a shorter range than howitzers of had to wait until WWII and the invention oflight two-
equal size, but are easier to move. Mortars spanned the way radios.
range of sizes from the hand carried Stokes trench
- Eric and Jane Lawson
mortar to the giant Big Bertha.
When the war broke out, artillerymen expected to
fight in a war of mobility and maneuver. The French
75mm field gun is an excellent example. The French
expressly designed this gun for rapid deployment and
its highly trained elite crew could move it into place,
set it up, and fire within minutes. A quick firing gun
with the modern breech loading design, it had novel
recoil and elevation mechanisms to fire 25 rounds per
minute over a 7,500 yard range. A shield on the front
protected the gun crew from enemy bullets and counter-
battery fire. The elite "75" destroyed the enemy infan-
uy on the open field with shrapnel, and its performance
at the 1914 Battle of the Marne made up for the dismal
record of the French artillery in 1870. The onset ofstatic
trench warfare demanded more siege guns and howit-
zers. Most armies were grossly under~uipped in this
category and spent 1915 playing catchup. Shell short-
ages also hampered both sides as industry slowly geared Gemum 77mm F k ld Gun
up to meet the bloody demands of each new offensive.
R- 19
-------1Landships!--------
1916
Sept. 15th: 50 British tanks from "C" and
"D" companies form up to attack Flers-
Gueudencourt. 32 tanks depart, 9 immediately
break down and 5 are disabled, 9 start late, but
the remainder take Flers.
Sept. 26th: A single British female Mk I tank
commanded by 2nd Lt. Storey captures I ,500
yards of enemy trenchworks and 370 prison-
ers in a hour in front of Gueudencourt, at a
cost of 6 wounded crewmen.
Oct.: British tanks are wasted in "penny-
packet" attacks along the line. Typical is a two
tank attack on Oct. 18th against Beaumont-
Hamel in the snow.
Nov. 13th-14th: 52 British tanks assembled
to attack Beaumont-Hamel. Two tanks capture
400 prisoners.
1917
April 9th: 20 British tanks attack Arras in
the rain, taking Vimy Ridge.
April lOth: II British tanks (of which 8
breakdown) of "D" company conduct an at-
tack on Bullecourt in the snow, but fail. The
Germans capture two Mk lis for examination
and are misled in thinking their current anti-
tank bullets are effective against tanks.
April lith: 6 British Mk II tanks (of which
3 break down) of"C" company attack Monchy-
le-Preux capturing it but are forced to retreat
by a lack of infantry support.
April 16th: 80 French Schneiders attack
over the Aisne River near Berry-au-Sac and
another 48 at Pontavert. Most are lost as re-
serve fuel cans carried outside the tanks are
ignited by German fire, frying the crews.
April 23rd: 6 British tanks in conjunction
with the 51st Division assault the chemical
works in the township ofRoeux but fail to take
it.
May 3rd: 8 French tanks attack Bulletts. On
the same day I 0 British tanks renew the attack
on Bullecourt but are repulsed .
May Sth: First combat debut of the French
St. Chamond tank. They attack Lauffaux in
conjunction with two groupes of Schneiders.
16 of 17 breakdown during the approach.
June 17th: 72 British tanks attack at
Messines. First use of the new, bulletproofMk
IV dismays the Germans.
July 31st: Six British tank battalions with
136 tanks are used at Ypres. Only 2 break down
but the muddy terrain proves too tough going
for the machines.
Aug. 18th: 12 British tanks eliminate five
German pillboxes along the Langemarck-St.
Julien road in a teJCtbook assault.
Oct. 23rd: 92 French tanks breakthrough at
Malmaison and attack artillery guns in the Ger-
man rear.
NOTABLE TANK ACTIONS 1916-18
Nov. 20th: 324 British tanks attack towards
Cambrai causing deep penetrations. In En-
gland, church bells ring for the first time at
news of the victory.
Nov. 21st: 49 British tanks attack near
Cantiang (southwest of Cambrai) entering the
town.
1918
March 21st: Debut of the German
panzertruppen. 5 captured Mk. IVs and 5A7Vs
spearhead attacks north and south respectively
of St. Quentin. Three A7Vs break down but
the remaining two do sterling work.
March 22nd: 30 British tanks used at Vaux.
17 are lost.
April 24th: 13 German A7V tanks attack
near Cachy. First tank to tank battle occurs.
May 27th: 19 captured Mk IVs lend sup-
port to German attacks against the British over
a I 0 km front at Juvincourt-et-Damaine. The
attacks largely succeed thanks to the infantry,
masking the failure of the tanks to contribute
much.
May 31st: 5 German A7Vs from ATD 2
stage a hasty attack north of Reims. Two are
lost to French artillery fire, one breaks down
and the remaining two retreat. Also on this date
the FT- 17 made its combat debut near Ploissy-
Chazelle counterattacking German thrusts to-
wards the Foret de Retz.
June 1st: 5 German A7Vs from ATD I and
10 captured Mk IVs attack southeast ofReims.
Two A7Vs break down before seeing action.
Bad terrain and obstacles create lengthy de-
lays for the remainder, spoiling the attack. Two
A7V s are lost (one recovered) and the surviv-
ing A7V retreats. Overall 9 tanks are lost.
June 9th: The surviving German A7Vs of
ATD I above along with ATD 3 attack at
Ressons-sur-Matz. 3 A7Vs break down I falls
in a pond, and I is lost but significant ~round
is gained.
June lith: 144 French tanks and five in-
fantry divisions counterattack the German
breakthrough at Ressons-sur-Matz taking
I ,000 prisoners and 19 guns. 70 tanks are lost.
June 22nd: 5 British Mk IV female tanks
con~uct the first ever armor attack at night,
causmg numerous enemy casualties.
July 4th: 60 British tanks (first use of the
new Mk V) are used at Hamel. None are lost
~nd I ,500 prisoners are taken. The Royal Fly-
mg Corps conducts its first ammunition air-
drop ever to resupply the tanks.
July 15th: 7 A7Vs have one last go at tak-
ing Reims attacking from the west, but fail
contributing little to the attack. ' Nov. 1st: 5 captured Allied Mk IVs spear-
July 18th: A mix of350 French Schneider
St. Chamond, and Renault FT-17 tanks are used
R- 20
to halt the Germans at the Second Battle of the
Marne.
July 23rd: 36 British tanks attack in con-
jun.ction with French troops at Moreuil (Mailly-
Rameval). 2,000 prisoners and 5 artillery pieces
are taken but 30 tanks are lost.
July 26th: 131 St. Chamonds spearhead a
French counterattack near Reims.
Aug. 8th: 425 British tanks used at
Marcel cave. Massive German surrenders along
the line.
Aug. 21st: The British use 190 tanks at
Bapaume.
Au~. Jist: German infantry and artillery
workmg together disable two of their own
side's A7Vs during a battle at Fermicourt (by
accident).
Sept. 12th: Lt. Col. Patton's 1st Tank Bde.
(144 American manned FT-17 tanks plus 24
French Schneiders) along with Lt. Col. Pullen's
3rd Tank Brigade (216 FT-17s and 35
Schneiders and St Chamonds) advance through
the mud capturing the St. Mihiel salient.
Sept. 26th: The lstTank Brigade (344th and
345th tank battalions) with 127 FT-17s led by
Lt. Col. Patton, along with 28 French
Schneiders, spearhead attacks along the
Meuse-Argonne. 43 tanks are lost the first day.
Sept. 28th: 34 Mk IV. and Mk V. tanks are
used by the American 30lst Tank Battalion at
Ronssoy. I 0 tanks are lost.
Oct. Sth: The American Meuse-Argonne at-
tack resumes. Of the 89 tanks in the I st Tank
Brigade taking part, only 8 are still "runners"
by the end of the day.
Oct. 8th: The American 30lst Tank Battal-
ion attacks at Brancourt. Of the 23 available
Mk IVs and Vs, 20 leave the start line and 9
break down or are destroyed on the first day.
Never the less the attack is a success, advanc-
ing 12 miles over the next two weeks. Also on
this day 8 German A7Vs and captured Mk IVs
counterattack British breakthroughs at
Agwoint and luway (southeast of Cambrai).
Oct. 14th: 24American FT-17 tanks (all that
remain operational) from the I st Tank Brigade
form a provisional company and successfully
attack towards the Barricourt Heights in the
Meuse-Argonne
Oct. 16th: 19 tanks of the American 30lst
Tank Battalion attack over the Selle River. Two
tanks are lost.
Oct. 23rd: All 12 remaining tanks of the
301st Tank Battalion form a provisional com-
pany and spearhead attacks against Bazuel,
Ors, and Catillion capturing all objectives.
head attacks by the German 28th Reserve Di-
vision and successfully drive back the British
southeast of Valciennes.
- - - - - - -1Landships! - - - - - - -
''boilerplate''). The demands of war found them in the
front lines at Arras in April 1917 however, where their
vulnerability to MG fire was amply demonstrated.
The Mk IV (1917) was the first large scale produc-
tion model manufactured and featured a number of im-
provements over the earlier Mk I and lis. The armor
was strengthened to 12mm which finally made the tank
bulletproof. Wider tracks were installed. The fuel tanks
were both enlarged (increasing range) and armored and
moved to a less vulnerable position. A fuel pump was
installed replacing the gravity feed used on earlier mod-
els (climbs or descents no longer interrupted the flow
of fuel to the engine). Best ofall in the opinion of some,
were improvements to the escape hatches. Also the
length of the 6 pdr. guns was cut down to make them
handier in combat. Curiously, in what seemed a back-
ward step, the lightweight Hotchkiss machine guns were
replaced with heavier Lewis models - which also had
the nasty habit of blowing cordite fumes directly in the
gunner's face. Over a thousand Mk IVs were produced.
This was the tank that failed miserably at Messine Ridge
and Passchendale (due to poor terrain and tactical de-
ployment) and succeeded brilliantly at Cambrai in No-
vember 1917.
The Mk V (1918) had the same dimensions as the
Mk IV but had a bigger !50 hp engine and an epicycle
steering gear (eliminating the two gearsmen and allow-
ing just one man to steer the beast). A second cab on
the roof facing backward plus a reverse gear allowed
the tank to be driven backwards. The Mk V was to be
the principal breakthrough tank of 1918. The Mk V
"Star'' was a lengthened version of the regular Mk V
with room to carry troops (the first armored personnel
carrier so to speak). None ever were as anyone in the
passenger compartment always got sick from the en-
gine fumes.
The British Army still wanted a fast tank and the
first experimental model, called the "Chaser" or Me-
dium A was exhibited and tested on March 3rd, 191 7.
It weighed 12 tons, had a speed of 8mph and 8mm ar-
mor. This tank was 20 ft. long and 8 ft. wide. It had.a
revolving turret with a machine gun. By the time the
Medium A reached production in October I917, it had
lost the turret but featured 14mm armor and 4 Hotchkiss
MGs offering all around fire. This tank was fast for
WWI standards and was thus christened, "Whippet".
Some 200 were made but it did not reach the front until
Spring of 1918.
Ill. The Might Have Beens
After the battle of Carnbrai, the Germans attempted
to copy the British tank designs by producing their own
A7VIU. Looking much like a British Mk IV, and with
all its faults, only one was ever produced. By the last
year of the war, the German tank committee group be-
gan to design bigger tanks to achieve a breakthrough in
19 I9. Ing. Vollmer and Capt. Wegner designed a 42 ft.,
I48 ton monster. It was powered by a 650 hp aircraft
engine giving it a speed of5 mph. Armament consisted
of four 77mm guns and seven machine guns. It carried
a crew of22. The tank was designed for easy disman-
tling into four sections for rail transport. (Curiously,
this design foreshadows the German effort in WWII to
design other impractical "monster" tanks). Only two
were built before the war ended. The last German tank
to be produced, but only after the war, was the LK II.
Developed as a counter to the success of the French
FT-I7 against German infantry, the LK II resembled
the British Whippet light tank. The MG version had a
fully revolving turret while the cannon armed model
had a limited traverse 37mm gun firing ahead and two
Maxim machine guns firing out the sides. It weighed 8
tons and it's speed was 9 mph. All the finished models
were sold to Sweden as part of the disarmament clauses
in the Treaty of Versailles.
The French tank committees also planned their mon- 9) German Tanks in World War I, Schneider and
ster tank, the Char de Rupture 2C. An early venion Strasheim, 1990
was first tested in December 1917, and was armed with I0) Landships, David Fletcher, 1984
a I 05mm howitzer in the turret. It was not successful, I I) Men Against Tanks, John Weeks, I975
so the Char 2C was developed. This tank carried a 75mm 12) Military Operations, 1915, Vol 2. Official His-
gun in the turret and three machine guns. The size of tory of the War, 1928
this tank was gigantic, some 43.2 ft. long, 12.8 ft. high 13) Story of Special Brigade, C. H. Foulkes, I934
and I0 ft. wide and weighed in at 68 tons. Despite this 14) Tank Story, Edited by Andrew Kershaw, 1973
it was surprisingly fast. With a crew of 12, it carried I5) Tank Warfare, Frank Mitchell, I930
10,000 rounds of gun and MG ammo. It's armor was 16) Tank Versus Tank, Kenneth Macksey, 1988
13mm at minimum and 45mm at it's thickest. Six of 17) Tanks, Vol. I and 2, Liddell Hart, I 959
these tanks were still in use in the 1940 campaign, but 18) Tanks and Weapons ofWWI, Ure Smith, 1973
had no effect on events. 19) Tanks in the Great War, J.F.C. Fuller, 1920
The last word of British tank design was the Mk Vlll 20) Tanks 1914-1918, Albert Stem, 1919
tank, a joint American and British design. Known as 21 ) Treat 'Em Rough, Dale E. Wilson, 1989
the "International" or"Liberty" tank, it weighed 37 tons, 22) War Cars, David Fletcher, 1987
had a crew of8 men, had two 6 pdr. guns each with 208 18.0 DESIGNER'S NOTES
rounds and seven .3 inch Browning MGs. The armor Old timers will see a similarity in this game to an
varied from IOmm to 16mm. Powered by a 300 hp en- previous design ofmine entitled "Rip the Front'', which
gine, it's speed was 7 mph. It too was big at 34.5 ft only covered the first tank-to-tank battle at Villers-
long, I0.3 ft. high and 12.5 ft. wide. It was the heaviest Bretenneaux. Released in I981, it received decent re-
tank placed into production during the war but only views despite it's unprofessional look. My own second
four had been made by the time the war ended. edition of the game, retitled Landships, was produced
Prior to the end ofWWI, the British had a number in 199 I but still lacked die-cut counters and colorful
of fast tanks on the boards in anticipation of Plan 1919. maps. As always, my main purpose in designing these
This plan envisaged an attack on a 90 mile front with game kits remained the same, that is, to do games that
800 Medium D tanks in two columns. Once the breach interested me as a designer and also hopefully catch
was created, another 1,200 tanks would pour through the eye of a professional publisher. This new third edi-
it, wrecking havoc on the rear area, some 20 miles away. tion of the game, Landships! now produced by Clash
This is not to mention another 2,500 heavy tanks at- of Arms, is a vast improvement over my own earlier
tacking as well. Overall the plan called for 5,000 tanks, efforts and was well worth the wait.
and I7,000 trained men to operate the tanks were When I design a game, first I look at the facts of the
needed! Yet this plan was considered perfectly feasible battle, i.e., is there a game there? After that, what is it I
and the final touches were being added by the end of want to portray? Most games I design are moderately
the war. The new Medium D tank weighed 20 tons and complex since I have no time to spare for cumbersome
was armed with a 6 pdr. and two MGs and more impor- game mechanics. However, I always attempt to remain
tantly, had a speed of25 mph and a range of I 00 miles. faithful to history even if it makes for some complica-
The tank was designed by Lt. Col. Johnson and overall tions. In Landships! I wanted to show the first tanks'
shape was wedge-like. The tracks were low to the uses and handicaps, along with the introduction of the
ground and different from previous tanks in that each other"wonder weapons". While not entirely true to lif~
track was a plate shoe held on a wire rope support. It the design does simulate the essential elements orw~
was a successful design but never built in any numbers. battles the early tanks were used in. The reseaJ'C.\\ IS,
Finally, in 1921, the Vickers gun company produced for the most part, quite good. Nearly all the scenarios
the Light Infantry Tank No. I. The tank still had the depicted in the game carne from several books. \he
rhomboidal track resembling the early tanks but had a tank movement rates on roads and over open terrail'(
revolving turret on top with a small cupola on top. The came from a few mathematical calculations based upo9
tank had either a 3 pdr. gun or three MGs in the revolv- the book, Tank Warfare by Lt. Mitchell, wl:\o was a tank
ing turret. Powered by a 85 hp engine it had a speed of commander in WWI. In his book, he stated that the Mk
15mph with a five man crew. Although the tank itself IV moved over I00-120 yards per minute on rlat groun<_!;
was well protected, during demonstrations there were 30-40 yards a minute over trenches. Purists may note
so many problems that the design was discarded. that some of the units, trucks and armored cars princi-
IV. Bibliography pally, are moving slower than their listed maximum
Much primary source material written by the origi- speeds. Remember that paved roads are rare in the front-
nal participants was published in the 1920s and I930s line areas depicted in the scenarios and no one wa'\\S\O
and has not, to my knowledge, been reprinted. Such lose a wheel in some shellhole. Just so you kn,o:tr, a
references are now very expensive to obtain and a large well-tuned Rolls Royce armored car on pavement go-
metropolitan library remains the best bet. A number of ing flat out would have a speed of around 65 bexes a
interesting primary and secondary French works on tum.
their operations remain untranslated to date. Fortunately, The artillery rules have been expanded anq changed
literature dealing with tank operations in the Great War from my earlier editions. Mos1 artiljery P,~ ~ ~
has been steadily increasing over time. Many of the was pre-planned and tactical flexibiU~ si~~~ wasn'\
books listed below are still available with a little dig- in the cards. Forward Observers techmea~ dl~ no have
ging. the right to call in artillery barrages on targets o( op-
I) A New Excalibur, A.J. Smithers, 1986 portunity, rather they were there \0 '"'observe'' and cor-
2) AFVs ofWWI, Crow, 1970 rect the fall of shots aimeq a1 pre-~rnneq ~C\S. ~e
3) Big Guns, Edited by Bernard Fitzsimons, 1974 rules attempt 0 model these 1-buthes. ~~sJ rcause a
4) The Boiler-Plate War, John Foley, 1963 hex has been ~go~ffi ~oes not mean 'f6 l~e can call in
5) Eyewitness, Maj. Gen. E. Swinton, 1933 a barrage on l~ellh. 1hhe ro~~~~· s\Tulates !he
h
6) Fighting Tanks, Ian Hogg, 1977 rear area arllJieQ' comman~er SimP. y ree1m~ (\Ia no{
7) German A7V Tank, Hundleby and Strasheim, enough reslsW,Jc'e 'has <>ccu~ al t t si(e !o jusllcy a
1990 garrage. )(a Ftr, Aftack resu1ftc:\ in a Elimlnalion or
8) German Tanks and Armored Vehicles 1914-1945, ~etrea , ~en \Pe artl\ e~ commande~ deeme~ the
B.T. White, 1968 ' rou~ a a& a s ccess an~ arli cry ~re 1s no n~ed.
P'ntlnued on Page 2~
R - 21
-------1Ulndships!-------
THE EVOLUTION OF AIR POWER IN THE GREAT WAR
Allied Supreme Commander, General Ferdinand
Foch, once dubbed military aviation "good sport, but
for the Army it is useless." Thus did many eyewitnesses
to the birth of air power fail to recognize the magni-
tude of the event. Such anitudes crippled early aircraft
more than the enemy. During the First World War, barely
II yean after Orville Wright first new, aircraft devel-
oped from a rickety pioneering experiment to a high
performance technology, and air forces developed from
misunderstood peripheral units into complex combat
forces. The lessons learned in this war became the ba-
sic dogma of air fighting.
When the First World War erupted in August 1914,
the organization, technology, and tactics of aerial units
were prunitive. The first nying squadrons were attached
to the signals secuons of their nation's armies for the
purposes ofobtaining information about enemy ground
forces. They were small units of a half dozen planes, a
mixture of prewar civilian types - the birdlike Ger-
man Taube, the wire braced French Farnam, or the
jaunty Bntish Sopwith Tabloid. These unarmed nying
machines performed visual aerial reconnaissances just
above the heads of enemy soldiers. Such observations
proved valuable during the opening war of movement
- especially considering that the traditional reconnais-
sance arm, the cavalry, was massacred.
New Roles
With the digging of the trench lines, new roles arose
for the airmen. First among these was artillery coop-
eration. The combatants soon assigned one squadron
to each army corps for the purpose of ranging and spot-
tmg the artillery. Observalton aircraft like the stable Brit-
ish B.E. 2 or the GermanAviatik C.l would circle above
a target while the guns tired ranging shots. With no
radios small enough for aircraft yet available, the plane
would periodically return to its own lines to drop a note
for the artillery commander. As technology caught up
with the needs of war, one-way wireless radio telegra-
phy became commonly used. Later, concise "clock
code" repons were radioed back to the artillery. These
used concentric rings of predetermined width (desig-
z.
nated Y, A, B, C, D, etc.) around the target (X) to
indicate the distance from the target, and a clock face
aligned with true north to indicate where the shell landed
in relation to the target. For example: a message "B 6"
means that the last shell landed I00 yards away (zone
B) and directly south (six-o-clock) of the bull's-eye.
However, communicating to a plane in night from the
ground continued to rely on large panels placed in pat-
terns on the ground.
Photographic reconnaissance also grew in impor-
tance during the war. Millions of aerial photographs
were taken for tactical and strategic intelligence. Over-
lapping stereographic photos revolutionized the science
of observation and magnified important details. Aerial
mapping gave infantry commanders information of the
ground that lay ahead of them. The aircraft were first
designed for stability, but this quality proved to he a
drawback during the inevitable dogfights. Later the
important characteristic was defensibility which in-
cluded higher service ceilings, bener field of tire for
the observer, better design for crew cooperation, im-
proved speed and maneuverability. Contrast the B.E.2c
from early in the war with the LVG C.VI of late in the
war. The B.E.2 had its observer seated several feet in
front of the pilot with his machine gun arcs restricted
by the wings and the pilot's head. It new at 72 m.p.h.
and could only reach 10,000 ft. The LVG C. VI how-
ever had the observer seated immediately behind the
pilot with a greater field of tire, and it new at speeds
over I05 m.p.h. and altitudes over 21 ,000 ft.
Experimental aerial bombardment began early in the
war and ended with a high level of development pre-
saging future blitzkriegs and air offensives. The Ger-
man Army first anempted to use their airships (mostly
of the Zeppelin type) in tactical aerial bombing, but
they proved too vulnerable in the deadly environment
of the Western Front. Airships were soon reserved for
strategic raids on England. Light bombs were experi-
mentally anached to any plane that could carry them
early in the war, usually a two-seater with its observer
left at home. Specialized designs with greater load lift-
ing capability began to reach the front in early 1917.
Aircraft like the D.H . 4 were used as "day bombers" to
attack enemy positions in the rear. Giant multi-engined
bombers like the British Handley-Page, the German
Gotha, the Italian Caproni, and the Russian Sikorsky
Hya Mourometz were used for more strategic bomb-
ing deep in the enemy's home territory. Britain's Gen-
eral Hugh Trenchard placed the greatest emphasis on
strategic bombing by forming the Independent Air Force
(IAF). This was analogous to the Strategic Air Com-
mand and was a distinct organization within the already
independent Royal Air Force (RAF). In 1918 these
bombers interdicted German rail movement and com-
munications and destroyed industrial facilities on the
Rhine.
Expertise in close infantry support increased dramati-
cally during the war. Dropping steel darts on enemy
troops in 1914 progressed to stick grenades and bombs
by 1917. When the ground offensives started making
headway again later in the war, the aircraft became a
necessary support to the infantry. Ground attack and
trench strafing was a key role for aircraft and required
specialized designs. The first effective armored aircraft
appeared in mid 1917 as the German Junkers J I. The
mfantry cooperation aircraft would serve to spot and
reduce targets in the infantry's path, interdict enemy
reinforcements, and report the status ofadvancing units
to commanders in the rear. Terms like "close support"
and "contour nying" date from the First World War.
Rile of the Fighter
All this aerial activity performed mostly by the slow
and stable two-seaters stimulated a counter threat -
the fighter plane. Ever since the war began the escala-
tion of armaments, aggressiveness, and deadliness car-
ried into the air. The first victory in the air occurred
within the first few weeks of war when an unarmed
plane literally forced down another plane by making
threatening feints as if to ram its foe. Soon rines and
carbines were carried aloft and many flying crews be-
came quite good at ruffling their enemy's feathers. One
R- 22
French pilot, Roland Garros, became frustrated with
the tediousness of maneuvering his plane close enough
to give his observer a good shot. He was given a
Morane-Saulnier monoplane exhibiting a unique con-
cept: a machine gun rigidly mounled in front of the
pilot. Special armor wedges were boiled to the propel-
ler blades to protect them from being shot away by the
stream of bullets. Garros took the plane up in April of
1915 and proved the idea a success. He started shoot-
ing down almost every plane he met, until he himself
was hit by ground tire two weeks later. He landed in
enemy territory where he and his machine gun concept
were confiscated by the Germans.
Anthony Fokker, a Dutch aircraft entrepreneur, saw
the contraption and took the design one step further.
Fokker made an "interrupter gear" to synchronize the
machine gun so it would not fire whenever the propel-
ler blade passed the gun barrel. This was the trick! The
"Fokker Scourge" ushered in a new phase aerial war-
fare and a new class of warriors- the "aces." The Al-
lies had linle to counter this technological breakthrough.
Unsynchronized machine guns were mounled on pusher
aircraft designs that have the engine and propeller out
of the way behind the pilot. The Vickers "gunbus" was
joined by other pusher designs such as the F. E. 2b and
D. H. 2.ln 1916 the French placed light machine guns
on the top wing of the Nieuport II to tire over the top
of the spinning propeller. These stopgap measures
bought time for the Allies to develop their own syn-
chronization devices.
Dynamic: Fighter Developments
The air war proceeded with dynamic rapid develop-
ments by each side to gain an edge on the other. Aerial
superiority on the Western Front seesawed from the
Germans to the Allies and back with each new break-
through. By late 1916 the Allies had a synchronized
machine gun on planes that outperformed the Fokker
Eindekkers. Then the Germans retaliated by grouping
their maneuverable single-seat fighters into jagdstaffeln
(tighter squadrons) that preyed on vulnerable Allied
two- seaters. This stimulated development of better es-
cort tactics and formation flying . Great aces like
Manfred von Richthofen, George Guynerner and Albert
Ball brought public anention to the air war. The Ger-
mans mass produced the sleekAibatros tighten armed
with two machine guns in 1917. The Allies responded
with even more maneuverable twin gun fighters like
the Sopwith Camel, the S.E. Sa, and the speedy SPAD
13. Fokker returned to the scene first with his infamous
triplane and finally the Fokker D. VII in 1918. Aircraft
designs became obsolete every few months under the
stresses of war. To compare the high performance fight-
ers of 1918 with their predecessors of 1914 would be
to liken today's F-18 to the Spitfire ofWWII.
T he Aerial Revolution
During the Great War, not only was the airplane revo-
lutionized, but more importantly the airplane revolu-
tionized war. More maneuverable fighters, better armed
observation planes, heavier bombers, stronger engines,
smarter tactics, more efficient organization, better train-
ing, new ammunition all made the war in the air that
much more complex and deadly. Airspeeds, maximum
altitudes and climb rates doubled, typical engine horse-
power increased fourfold, machine gun tire rates went
up ten times, and bomb loads increased even more!
What began as an adjunct to the signals sections of
armies became mighty independently responsible
armed services like the Royal Air Force. The concepts
and applications ofair power developed during the First
World War remain the basis of air power strategies to-
day.
- Eric and JtJM Lawson
-------1Landships!-------
INFANTRY TACTICS DURING THE FIRST WORLD WAR
The Infantry, more than any other group, suffered
the horrors of the Great War. They fought across battle-
field after battlefield. The Somme, the Argonne, the
Piave, Riga, and Verdun " ... transformed men's souls.
Whoever floundered through this morass full of the
shrieking and the dying, whoever shivered in those
nights, had passed the last frontier of life, and hence-
forth bore deep within him the leaden memory of a
place that lies between Life and Death, or perhaps be-
yond either." (Werner Beumelburg, Reichsarchiv Vol.
1).
OrJanlzation and Equipment
In 1914 the infantry was organized for a war of ma-
neuver on a massive scale. The main unit was the corps
comprising 40,000 men. A corps had two infantry divi-
sions, each containing four regiments of three 1,000
man battalions. The corps was a rigid organization and
units did not transfer between corps. The typical infan-
try company in 1914 contained 250 men divided into
three platoons. Machine guns were grouped into sepa-
rate sections of two to six guns. They were not directly
attached to the rifle companies.
The rifles the infantry carried were rapid fire bolt
action types with a 5 to 10 bullet magazine. The Ameri-
can .30 caliber Springfield model 1903, British Lee-
Enfield, and German 7.92mm Mauser 1898 all weighed
about 9 pounds, were about 4 feet long, and sported
bayonets about 18 inches long. The heavy machine
guns, Vickers and Spandau, were based on the Maxim
with water cooled barrels and heavy mountings. Light
machine guns (LMG) like the British Lewis, the French
Hotchkiss, and the German Parabellum became more
abundant as the war progressed. By the end of the war
each rifle company was supplied with several LMG.
Next, the Germans introduced flamethrowers to sup-
port infantry assaults. The Allied Stokes trench monar
and German Minenwerfer contributed greater combined
arms support. New hand grenades and rifle-launched
grenades also became standard equipment for assault-
ing infantry. Pioneer, engineer, and technical sections
grew dramatically in proportion during the war and
formed the nucleus of the assault squads.
Later in the war due to manpower shortages and the
need for closer command integration, divisions became
the main parent organization and were convened to three
regiments. A corps became more of a geographical
"area" along the front, and any unit stationed there be-
came pan of that corps.
Designer's Notes Continued
The whole idea behind the artillery rules is that artil-
lery was directed at points where the resistance was
strongest. Thus, if a position were attacked unsuccess-
fully over a period of time, odds are that a request for
anillery fire on that position would be responded to
rather than an enemy position which was fired on only
a few times.
While Landships! is oriented around the uses of
tanks, players can still have an enjoyable game using
only the infantry and artillery rules. Try to find a way
around the trenches using conventional tactics. Then
try a few scenarios with the tanks and see the differ-
ence (and confidence) a tank or two can make.
So I hope you enjoy it. My intent was to give you a
bird'seye view of tank use in the Great War plus a peek
at the other "war winners" both sides came up with. I
think I've succeeded in as much as any game could
possibly recreate any battle. I mean, can one really simu-
late the 100 degree heat inside the tanks, the deafening
noise, the fright within the men as these monsters ap-
proached, the shock of armor piercing shells entering
the tank spHntering metal, or simply even the terror of
infantry crossing no-mans-land in face of MG fire?
World War One infantry adopted the first widespread
use of camouflage. The red pants, Tartan kilts, shiny
buttons, and silver breastplates leftover from the
Napoleonic era soon gave way to drab earth tones and
broken pattern camouflage uniforms.
Trench Warfare
After the battle of the Marne, both sides raced to
form a line which the other could not outflank and dug-
in to defend it. On the western front, opposing
trench lines extended unbroken and fully manned from
the Swiss border to the English Channel. This unprec-
edented phenomenon of war was caused by numerous
reasons, including the following few points: the clash
of traditional and modern tactics, the impact of mod-
ern technology, and the sheer number of combatants
present. The war of maneuver required an enemy with
a flank, which contiguous trenchlines denied. Armies
found the trench to be the best defense against tradi-
tional linear assault tactics. The new age of rapid fire
rifles, machine guns, and quick firing artillery made
the open battlefield so deadly that all infantrymen were
issued entrenching tools as standard equipment. Erwin
Rommel wrote as an infantry lieutenant in 191 5 that
"even in the attack the spade is as important as the rifle."
France mobilized 4 million troops in August 1914, Ger-
many 4.5 million, and Russia 6 million troops. Such
forces could form a line standing shoulder to shoulder
from the Alps to the beaches of Belgium ... and they
did.
The infantryman's lot declined from there. He had
to dig deeper fortifications as the enemy brought up
heavier and more numerous artillery pieces. Opposing
frontline trenches were only a football field apart, some-
times not even that. An American rifleman defined the
front as "when there is not another damn man between
you and the enemy." Communication trenches, zigzag-
ging to protect against sniper fire, connected the front
to many tiers ofsandbagged support trenches and even-
tually to the reserve trench and rear areas. Machine gun
emplacements with interlocking fields of fire, monar
pits, light artillery emplacements, and even searchlights
dotted the lines. Barbed wire, another recent invention,
was maintained in front and around the main trenches.
Temporary firing pits were dug forward from the front
trench for grenade throwing parties and as jumping off
points for nightly trench raiding. Underground were
bunkers for sleeping, storing ammunition, and tunnel-
ing under the enemy trenches to place large explosives.
19.0 CREDITS AND ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Game Design: Perry Moore
Game Development: Stephen Rawling
Historical Commentary: Perry Moore, with Eric and
Jane Lawson
Rules Editing: Stephen Rawling
Layout and Typesetting: Paul Dangel
Production Coordination: Stephen Rawling
Box Art: John Rota
Map: Rick Barber
Counters: Paul Dangel and Rick Barber
Playtesting and Collation: Walter Dippel, Fran Kiger,
Bill Koff, Eric Lawson, John Leonard, Perry Moore,
Geoffrey Rawling, George Rawling, Stephen Rawling,
Tim Tynan, Jim Werbaneth, and Ed Wimble
Special Thanks To: David Isby, who pioneered the first
WWI tactical game, Soldiers, way back in 1972!
R- 23
Life in the trenches was miserable. Bombardment,
sniper fire, poison gas, flooding, disease, frostbite, hun-
ger, and trenchfoot were endless. Battalions typically
rotated in and out of the trenches every two weeks.
Maintenance of these trench systems under the strain
of constant bombardment and raiding was most diffi-
cult. The Germans in early 1917 retreated many miles
to the Hindenburg Line, a complex of concrete rein-
forced fortifications built in relative peace, partly to stay
ahead of the Allies in trench quality.
The western front was never "all quiet." During the
day artillery churned up the trenches and each night
patrols went into No-Man's-Land. Small squads
crawled forward armed with wire-cutters, hand gre-
nades, rifles, spades sharpened for close combat, and
sometimes a light machine gun. They repaired the wire
entanglements before their own trench, cut those in front
of the enemy trench, and raided enemy posts for intel-
ligence. Fierce fire fights erupted when unfriendly pa-
trols met. Body armor was adopted by some troops to
protect the snipers and for hand-to-hand combat. Im-
ages of club wielding, armor clad, gas masked soldiers
were somewhere between medieval and surreal.
Cracking the trenches was insurmountable. In as-
saults, row after row of infantry would go over- the-top
on queue as soon as the artillery barrage lifted. If the
barrage lifted too late the troops were caught by their
own shells- too early and the enemy would have time
to come out of their bunkers and reestablish their ma-
chine gun posts. In either case, the Poor Bloody Infan-
try was caught in someone's crossfire. On the first day
of the Somme Offensive (July I, 1916) I00,000 British
troops attacked the German trenches. Within a few hours
almost 19,000 of them were dead and half of the rest
were wounded.
Closing Maneuvers
While the Allies had wisely pinned their ~ oa
developing the tank, the Germans worked to perfect
and stretch infantry tactics to their limit. The columns
and skirmish lines of 1914 were replaced by loose-for-
mation infiltration tactics. Sturmbataillone were inte-
grated self-supporting platoons of light machine guns
(LMG), grenade-launchers, riflemen, and stormtroops.
The LMG suppressed enemy fire and covered the rifle
and stormtroop "stosstrupp" squads as they maneuvered
into position. Immediate artillery support was provided
by modified light Russian 7.62 em guns (captured on
the eastern front) and minenwerfers rolled forward by
the assault troops. Their objectives were to bypass
strongpoints in the first wave, create local fire superi-
ority, and produce many small breakthroughs. The stoss
units extensively rehearsed their maneuvers. The al-
lies later developed similar measures. In addition to
close training with tanks, the French and American in-
fantry in the Meuse-Argonne offensive carried mortars,
light Chauchat LMG, and the quick firing hand-por-
table 37mm field gun. The Allies found combined as-
sault tactics employing infantry with handfuls of tanks,
artillery, and overhead air support to yield the best re-
sults. The tank was so successful that the Germans re-
sponded with a Mauser 13mm antitank rifle weighing
35 lbs., and employed light artillery pieces as antitank
guns.
Through four and a half years of war, infilntry tac-
tics evolved from the formal rank and file of the nine-
teenth century to the small unit combined arms squads
of the twentieth. The assault tactics, the applications of
modem technology to the battlefield, and the concepts
derived from the agonies of the trenches led the way
for the blitzkriegs of the future. But in the end it was
the infantry who took the ground, bore the casualties,
and won the war.
- Eric and Jane Lawson
-------1Landships!-------
contents
1.0 INTRODUCTION.. I 6.14 Hard to Steer Vehicles. .6 11.11 Bringing Aircraft Into Play.• 11
1.11 Game Scale•• I 6.15 Movement Restrictions.•6 11.12 Dogfights•• 11
2.0 GAME COMPONENTS. . I 6.16 Tank Breakdowns..7 11.2 Anti-Aircraft Fire..12
2.1 The Map. . I 6.2 Vehicle Movement• . 7 11.21 AA Gun Fire Procedure. .12
2.2 Soft Tar&et Units• . I 6.21 Wire Hexes..7 11.22 Ground Fire Procedure. .12
2.21 Foot Troops (FTs). . I 6.22 Thench Hexes•• 7 11.3 Close Support Minions•• 12
2.22 Crews. .l 6.23 Rough Terrain••7 11.31 Artillery Observation.• 12
2.23 Individuals. .l 6.24 Mlneflelds . .7 11.32 Bombing Missions..12
2.24 Cavalry Troops (CTs).•2 6.3 Cavalry Movement• •7 11.33 Straftng Mission.• 12
2.3 Weapon Units• .2 6.31 Cavalry Modes. .7 12.0 CLOSE ASSAULT PHASE . .12
2.4 Vehicles. .2 6.32 Cavalry Speeds.. 7 12.1 General Rule• .12
2.41 Vehicle Types. .2 6.33 Char&e Attacks•• 7 12.11 Bonus Move• •12
2.42 Vehicle Weapons and Ranges. •2 6.34 Cavalry Fright. . 7 12.12 Who Is Affected. •12
2.43 Vehicle Mobility..2 6.35 Movement Restrictions. .7 12.2 Close Auault Procedures.• 12
2.44 Vehicle Size..2 7.0 FOOT TROOP MOVEMENT PHASES..7 12.21 No Vehicles Present •. 12
2.45 Vehicle Indicators. .3 7.1 General Rule. .8 12.22 Vehicles Present•• 12
2.46 Vehlde Crews• .3 7.11 Terrain Costs•.8 12.23 Vehicles Alone. •13
2.5 Aircraft Units. .3 7.12 Enemy Occupied Hexes..8 12.24 Restrictions•. 13
2.51 Ain:raft Type. .3 7.13 Wire Hexes. .8 12.3 Close Assault Modifiers.• 13
2.52 Strafe Value. .3 7.14 Mlneflelds..8 12.31 Column Shift Modifiers . . 13
2.53 Bombing Factor• .3 7.15 Moving Weapon Units• .8 12.32 Die Roll Modifiers. .13
2.54 Air Combat Bonus••3 8.0 FIRE ATTACKS •.8 12.33 Pinned Units In Close Assault. •13
2.55 Immunity to Ground Fire•. 3 8.1 Facing and Fire Arcs ..8 13.0 WEAPON UNITS IN COMBAT..13
2.56 Aircraft Movement Allowances.•3 8.11 Definitions• •8 13.1 Man Portable Weapons..13
3.0 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS BEFORE YOU 8.12 The Fire Arc•. 8 13.11 General Rule. .13
BEGIN . .3 8.2 Spotting and Lines of Sight (LOS) . .8 13.12 AT Rifle Rules•. 13
3.1 Stacklng. .3 8.21 Spotting Ranges. .8 13.13 Flamethrower Rules . .13
3.11 General Rule. .3 8.22 Automatic Spotting.•8 13.14 MGs and Weakly Armored Tanks. .13
3.12 Stacklng Limits. .3 8.23 Lines of Sight (LOS)•.8 13.2 Crew Served Weapons..13
3.13 Oose Assault Stacklng• .3 8.24 Becoming Unspotted• .8 13.21 AT Guns..13
3.14 Stacklng and Retreats••3 8.3 The Defensive Fire Phases• .8 13.22 ART Guns..13
3.2 Zones of Control. .3 8.31 Rates of Fire• •8 13.23 AA Guns ..13
3.3 Supply Rules. .3 8.32 Changing Facing..9 13.24 Untrained Unit Fire. .14
4.0 THE SEQUENCE OF PLAY.•3 8.4 The Offensive Fire Phase••9 14.0 TLs, FOs AND CREWS .• 14
5.0 THE BARRAGE PHASE. .4 8.41 Rates of Fire• . 9 14.1 General Rule..14
5.1 Role of the Forward Observer (FO). .4 8.42 Changing Facing. •9 14.11 Tank Leaders (TLs)..14
5.1I FO Procedure..4 8.43 Vehicle Fire Sequencing• •9 14.12 Forward Observers •. 14
5.12 Aircraft As FOs. .4 8.5 Anti-Tank Fire Attacks (ATFAs)• .9 14.13 Crews..14
5.13 Automatic Observation ..4 8.51 Tar&et Designation..9 14.14 Overrun ..14
5.14 First 1\Jrn Ban-ages ••4 8.52 Combining Fire. .9 15.0 SPECIAL GERMAN TANK RULES . . 14
5.2 Types of Artillery Barrages•.4 8.53 AT Fire Procedure. •9 15.11 German Tank Crew Morale. .14
5.21 Drumfire Barrage..5 8.54 Multl.Shot AT Weapons ..9 15.12 Subsequent Penalties . .14
5.22 Hurricane Barrage. . 5 8.55 ATFA Restrictions . . 9 16.0 OPTIONAL RULES. •14
5.3 Ammo Selection.. 5 8.56 Target Acquisition .•9 16.1 Optional Infantry Rules•• 14
5.3 I High Explosive..5 8.57 Terrain and Size Modifiers••9 16.11 Training• .14
5.32 Shrapnel..5 8.58 AT Gun Close In Bonus. .9 16.12 Morale. .14
5.33 Smokescreen .•5 8.59 ART Guns vs. Armored Cars/Trucks.IO 16.13 Rifle Grenades. .1 5
5.34 Gas..5 8.6 Small Arms Fire Attacks (SAFAs) .. 10 16.14 MG Options. . 15
5.4 Resolving Indirect Fire Barrage Attacks. . 5 8.61 Tar&et Designation ..10 16.15 Stosstruppen ..15
5.41 Scatter Check. .5 8.62 Combining Fire..10 16.2 Optional Weapons and Terrain .. IS
5.42 Barrage Fire Strengths..S 8.63 SAFA Procedure..10 16.21 Changing WU Facing. . 15
5.43 Determining the Result•. S 8.64 Terrain Effects•. 10 16.22 Artillery Restrictions.. 15
5.5 Indirect Fire Barrage Results.•S 8.65 MG Fire Bonuses . . 10 16.23 Direct Fire Ranges. .IS
5.51 Hits on Foot Troops• . 5 8.66 SAFAs and Cavalry. •10 16.24 Improving the Defenses..15
5.52 Hits on Cavalry Troops ..5 8.67 SAFAs Against Vehicles.. II 16.3 Optional Vehicle Rules•• 15
5.53 Hits on Weapon Units .•5 8.68 SAFAs and Trucks . . 11 16.31 Poor Tank Designs. . IS
5.54 Hits on Vehicles. .5 8.7 Mixed Tar&et Types. . 11 16.32 Tank Doctrine•• IS
5.55 Hits on Wire Markers•.6 9.0 APPLYING SACRT RESULTS. . II 16.4 Optional Aircraft Rules..15
5.56 Gas Attack Results .•6 9.1 Morale Checks .• II 16.41 Fighter Strafe Attacks .• 15
5.6 I ndlrect Fire Restrictions . .6 9.11 Procedure• . Jl 16.42 CS Aircraft Restrictions. . 15
5.7 Direct Fire Attacks..6 9.12 Morale Rating Modifiers. . 11 16.43 Bomber Defensive Fire. •IS
6.0 VEHICLE AND CAVALRY MOVEMENT 9.2 Pins. . II 16.44 Superior German Armament•• 15
PHASE..6 9.3 Retreats• •II 16.5 Additional Units•• 15
6.1 Vehicle Movement.•6 9.4 Advance After Combat. .11 17.0 HISTORICAL COMMENTARY• . 16
6.11 Movement Procedure•.6 10.0 THE PIN REMOVAL PHASES. . II 18.0 DESIGNER'S NOTES. .21
6.12 Road Mode. . 6 11.0 THE AIR PHASE. . II 19.0 CREDITS & ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS . .23
6.13 Changing Vehicle Facing. . 6 11.1 Mission Procedure.. 11

Copyright 1994 Clash of Arms Games

Printed in the USA

R- 24
 .
Errata and Clarifications (as of 12-01 -94)
by Perry Moore
The Box
Yes, the date on the back of the box is wrong! The first
tank attack occurred Sept 15th, 1916. The date is noted
correctly in the scenarios and historical commentary.
The Map
On Map #1 , the trench line from hexes 3607 to 4005 are
missing their brown overprint. These are considered trench
hexes for all intents and purposes.
The Charts
The -1 on the FOT for the French in 191 4-15 is not a
misprint Instead it symbolizes the elan of the French 75mm
("Miss 75"} gun crews who were trained to literally start
fi ring before they deployed. Naturally these crews were all
deaa (or at least less enthusiastic by 1916).
The Rules
6.14(a) (Addition) To place a more meaningful penalty on
Whippets that go out of control, add + 2 to any SAFA
attacks conducted by an out of control Whippet later that
turn during the Offensive Fire Phase.
6.16 (Addition) Increase the German A7V's breakdown
modifier to +0 in any scenario taking place in Sept 1918 or
later. This reflects increased reliability of the tank once
certain modifications were made.
6.34 (Clarification) There is no minimum distance a cavalry
unit may charge at A charge may begin from a hex
adjacent to the enemy.
6.35 (Addition) This rule applies when at least two cavalry
troops exist to form a group
7.13 (Clarification) Player may deploy Wire markers on top
of their own trench hexes. In this case, Wire penalties are
cumulative with Trench benefits.
NOTE: Players may wish to adopt this tactic to deny the
enemy the full benefit of capturing a friendly trench line.
When this tactic is chosen, the wire is assumed to be on both
sides of the trench line, hence the penalty (those inside feel
trapped!).
8.21 (Clarification) Spotting Ranges represent the distance
that one unit may see another unit occupying a particular
terrain type, not the range at which a unit may see out of a
particular terrain type.
8.23 (Clarification) If either the firing or target unit is
occupying the blocking terrain, the LOS is not blocked
(assuming no other intervening blocking terrain between
them). The LOS may be tracea along the line forming the
side of the of a single blocking terrain hex, but no along two
or more or between two adjacent blocking terrain hexes.
Case 1 (Clarification) The restrictions on tracing a LOS
through friend ly units applies even if they are occupying a
trench hex in front of the firing unit(s).
NOTE: This restriction is in ihe game to encourage proper
tactics regarding flank attacks. Imagine a line of four enemy
units along a row of hexes. If they were allowed to project as
much fire to the flank as to their front, no flank attack could
ever succeed. Player who wish to simulate British 1ndirect
fire MG tactics may allow British MG platoons (only) to fire
through friendly units but the MG SACRT bonus (-1) is lost
The morale penalty still applies for coming under MG fire.
Case 6 (Addition) Players may not trace a LOS through a
hex (and thus may not fire through) that is undergoing an
indirect barrage attack that turn.
NOTE: This addition will allow players with lots of artillery
to recreate the famous "Barrage Box" artillery tactic, shielding
their units from enemy observation as they slog through no
man 's /and.
Case 7 (Addition) Units in a trench hex w ishing to fire on
enemy units in the same trench line may only do so if the
enemy units are adjacent Units outside the trench may of
course be attacked as usual.
NOTE: Trenches were dug with numerous twists and turns
every 7 meters or so. It is unlikely units could spot or fire on
enemy units in the same trench more than one hex away.
9.2 and 9.3 (Clarification) If a unit suffers a second Pin
result and cannot retreat (for any reason), it is Eliminated
instead.
10.0 (Reiteration) Units do not unpin automatically if they
are inside the three hex radius of a Gas marker.
12.1 (Clarification) Players may not deliberately target or
conduct Barrage Attacks or SAFAs into or out of a hex that is
locked in Close Assault Combat Note that an indirect fire
Barrage Attack may accidently scatter into such a hex.
Vehicles alone in a hex with enemy FTs, CTs or Vehicles
may conduct SAFAs or ATFAs (at range 0) against them in
place of the Close Assault Combat procedure.
The Scena rios
17.5 (Addition) Tank Fright is checked for in the German
player's half of the turn as well as for any German units that
remain in the tank's hex.
17.7 (Change) The scenario length is 14 turns, not 12.
Also reinforcements cannot be delayed as to when they
arrive, they must enter on the designated turn or they do
not arrive at all.
1 7.1 2 (Change) Increase the scenario length to 12 turns.
17.1 4 (Correction) The two British 4-9-5· infantry platoons
ent~ring on Turn 1 should, of course, be 4-6-5s.
17.21 (Clarification) The German LK lis are cannon armed
in this scenario.
 1Iandshipsr
TERRAIN EFFECTS CHART SPOTI1NG RANGE CHART
Type of Unit Moving NOTES Unit Type
TERRAIN TYPE (a) Use Road Movement Rate. Terrain the
TLsiFOsl ACs/ FI'sl
CTs Tanks Trucks Sblps (b) Some scenarios designate Unit Is In AA,ART CTs Tanks Other Ships
FI's Vehicles
some or all Clear terrain as AT Guns
'""'':'--"~ Rough. Tanks moving Clear or
~""'"'~ Yt Road 1/lMP IMP IMP IMP PRO through Rough terrain add Rough 8 9 10 9 NA
~Bridge (a) (a) + 1 to the die roll when Swamp or
rolling for breakdowns. Wood
3 4 NA(a) NA NA
(c) May not use Charge Town 1 2 2 I NA

lfi\1
.....
~ ~
Trench 1/lMP 3MPs IMP PRO PRO
movement rate up out of a
depression or up a hill.
(d) May do so along a road
Trench or
Strongpolnt
Hill or
2 OT OT OT NA

only. 2 3 4 3 NA
~f·3:'
Depression

,._.,.,. · AClear IMP IMP IMP IMP PRO

(e) Fife Value halved and MR
reduced to ''3".
River 4 s NA NA 10

\ ''• ' (f) Roll for unit elimination

for each hex entered as per
Road or
Wire or OT OT OT OT NA
Minefield
See scenario instructions.
Clear #1: Number of hexes target hex must be within of spot-
Rough IMP IMP IMP 2MPs PRO (g) fT-17 and variants may
above (b) ting units to be spotted. However, if a unit conducts a
enter Woods at a 1MP cost.
Fife Attack, it is spotted by any opposing unit within
(b) Must use Trot speed 10 hexes with a LOS to the hex it occupies.

II~T•••
throughout move if OT: Use Other Terrain in hex. NA: Not Allowed
IMP IMP IMP IMP PRO crossing a River. (a) fT-17 and variants that enter Woods are spotted
(I) Hard to Steer tanks pay +2 up to 5 hexes away.
~ _.. MPs to change facing

-~~-
except along a road.
TANK II or Hexes Poor
IMP IMP IMP IMP PRO BREAKDOWN ._---TM..:.o:...v..:.ed,_---1 Trench
SJOn (c) (d) MP: Movement Point.
CHART 1-3 1 4-7 1 8+ Crosser
OT: Use Other Terrain in hex
to detennine terrain cost. Breakdown #I 10 19-loTs.1o 7-10
.~J
, . ' Hil PRO: Prohibited terrain for Note: After moving the tank, roll one 10-sided
IMP IMP IMP IMP PRO that unit type. die and add/subtract the Tank Breakdown Modi-
(c) (d) fier. If the final adjusted die roll is greater than or
NA: Not Applicable

·w-
equal to the above range, the tank breaks down.
TLs: Tank Leaders.
Specific Tank Type Die Roll Modifiers
FOs: Forward Observers. +2 Schneider, Vickers U.Tank
IMP IMP PRO PRO PRO
(g) FI's: Foot Troops. +1 British Mk.I, Carro Armato,
en: Cavalry Troops. St.Charnond, Char2C, A7V, LKJI

•~s-•
ACs: Annored Cars . 0 British Mlcs.IV. V, and VIn, all other
tanks
•.. River IMP 3MPs PRO PRO IMP NOTE: Half hexes formed by -I Whippet, Renault fT-17 varian!5
,,., .. '.~·.'t: (b) Generic Die Roll Modifiers
.;,..~~ the grid along the map edges
are fully playable and treated as -1 Tank Leader onboard
complete hexes in every way. In +I Any tank moving through "Rough"
addition, "Clear" terrain hexes Terrain
IMP IMP PRO PRO PRO +I fT-17 and variants moving through
include those with any number
Woods
of shellholes, or solitary trees
or buildings. In short, Clear ter- Note: Any tank that is a poor trench crosser rolls
rain hexes are all those not spe- on that column instead, regardless of the number
• Strong- OT OT OT OT PRO cifically labeled some other ter- of hexes moved each time it enters an enemy
point trench hex, using only the Tank Leader (if one is
rain type. Town hexes consist
on board) and Rough terrain modifiers (do not
of only those hexes containing
use the specific tank type modifiers).
!ill) Wire OT SMPs OT PRO PRO
buildings that have a proper
name printed near them, i.e.
(e) (e) "Martel" on Map 3. TYPE OF Die Roll Modifier
Wire BREAKDOWN -1 if a Tank Leader on board
CHART Note: Roll immediately upon
0 0 • go0 Mine-
IMP IMP IMP IMP PRO
Die Breakdown
Roll Type
breaking down to determine
0 ooo field seriousness of problem.
o•• (f) 1,2 Temporary Temporary Breakdowns can be
repaired, see the Tank Repair
+IMP 3,4,5,6 Permanent Chart.
Changing Facing NA NA (I) +IMP +IMP

AA F1RE CHART (AA Guns Only) TANK REPAIR Die Roll Modifier
Roll three times vs. any one Aircraft in range per phase. A "1" is a hit. CHART -1 if a Tank Leader on
Score 1 Hit: The Aircraft may not Observe that turn, or adds +I to any Bomb or Strafe attacks Die Breakdown board
conducted that tum. Roll Status Note: Roll during each
Score 2 Hits: The Aircraft aborts mission altogether. Remove from play. Does not count for victory Pin removal Phase. Tanks
1,2 Fixed that are fixed may resume
purposes.
Score J IDts: Aircraft shot down. Does count for victory purposes. 3,4,5,6 Still Broken moving next tum.

CHARTS
--------1Candships! - - - - -- - -
SMALL ARMS COMBAT RESULTS
TABLE (SACR'I)
CLOSE ASSAULT
COMBAT RESULTS 0 COMMUNICATION CHECK
Roll a die for each hex targeted. On a roll of 1-3, the FO is "in
TABLE (CACR'I) Communications" with the rear. Go to the Fire Order Table below.
Die Fire Strength Hitting Hex
Roll 2-4 5·8 9-15 16-22 23-29 30+ Number of Units Aircraft are always assumed to be in communications.
Die Differential
Rcll
1• or H
less
H H H H H 0 +1 +2 +3 4+ f) FIRE ORDER TABLE (FO'I)
0 or ']J. Number of turns tbe Die Roll Modifiers (use all that
2 H H H H H H less 31- 31- DI?J· DI?J·
Die hex as been attacked apply):
3 . H H H H H 1 11· 21· 31- 31- DI?J- Roll to no effect: -1 if an aircraft in 1915-16 is
requesting the Fire Order.
4 . . H H H H 2 11· 21· 21· 21· 31- 0 1 2 3 4+
-2 if an aircraft in 19 17+ is
5 . . . H H H 3 -/1 11- 1/- 21· 21· 1 F F F F F requesting the Fire Order.

6 . . . . H H 4 -/1 111 111 112 21- 2 . F F F F

-I if French ground units are
requesting a Fire Order in any
7 . . . . . H 5 -12 112 2/2 211 21- 3 . - F F F 19 14-1 S scenario.
- I if German ground units are
. . . . . . 6 ·12 -/1 213 212 211 4 . . - F F requesting a Fire Order in any
8+
* When firing at cavalry, a second throw of 7+ -13 ·12 112 212 211 5 . . . . F +I 1918-19 scenario.
if Russian ground units are
a "I" results in the horses being lost.
NIN: Defender's Losses/ 6 . . . . . requesting a Fire Order in any
Deploy the equivalent infantry or MG Attacker's Losses with N scenario.
platoon in its place. ACs suffer wheel Results:
damage on a second throw of a " I". equal to the number of - : Request for Barrage Attack is ignored. No Effect.
platoons removed. F : Rear area artillery commander agrees to the request. The
Die Roll Modifiers: DE: All defending platoons nominated on board artillery units or off board modules
-I per each MG platoon or every two removed. may Barrage Attack th~ target hex.
Vehicle MGs firing.
-I if this is SAFA against Mounted cavalry.
-I if the target units are in a River hex.
Column Shift Modifiers:
Shift I column left if Close
Assault occurs in a Town
e NOTE: Roll
SCATTER TABLE
+I if the vehicle conducting the SAFA
hex. before Die Roll Drumfire, Gas, Hurricane
moved during the Vehicle Movement Smoke Barrage Barrage
Phase. Shift I column left if any determining
enemy tanks are in the hex. 1,2,3 On Target On Target
+I if the target units are in a Swamp, effects of
Woods or Trench hex. Shift I column right if any
friendly tanks are in the Barrage 4 On Target Scatters
+2 if the target units are in a Town or
Strongpoint hex. hex. 5,6 Scatters Scatters
+2 if firing at aircmft. Die Roll Modifiers:
Note: Cavalry units may only receive the -I for each Pinned defending
River, Swamp, Woods and Town benefits. enemy platoon in the hex. 0 BARRAGE COMBAT
RESULTS TABLE (BCR'I)
Die Roll Modifiers:
+I if the units are in a
Vehicles may only receive the Town -1/+1 for each friendly/enemy Trench or Woods hex.
benefit. MG platoon in the hex. Fire Strength Hitting
Die Hex +2 if the units are in a
H: Unit(s) in the target hex are Hit. Each -21+2 for each friendly/enemy Roll Town or Strongpoint
unit must undergo a separate Morale flamethrower in the hex 10 20 30 40+ hex.
Check. Units which pass are Pinned. (does not use up a shot). -I if cr units are in the
1-2 H+1 H+2 H+2• H+2• target hex.
Already Pinned units which pass instead Note: Pinned units do not
Retreat 2 hexes and remain Pinned. Units count towards calculating the 3 H+1 H+l H+2 H+2 -I if unit is in a River hex.
which fail (whether already Pinned or not) differential, but may be used
are Eliminated. Add +I to the Morale 4 H H+1 H+2 H+2 Note: Cavalry units may
to satisfy losses. Each tank
Check die roll if any (but not for each) MG and armored car counts as a 5 - H H+1 H+2 only receive Woods, River
platoons (or at least two Vehicle MGs) platoon towards the owning and Town benefits.
were firing. Aircraft are shot down on a side's number of units present. 6 . . H H+1 Vehicles may only receive
"H" result. 7+ . . . . Town benefit.
MG, AT RIFLE, FLAMETIIROWER * Possible only against poorly armored Tanks (those Results:
ATTACKS VS TANKS marked with an " !"). Requires an MG platoon or • : Miss. No Effect.
at least two Vehicle MGs. • : Any Wire Marker in the hex is eliminated on a "I" only.
To Hit Number H : Hit. All Soft Targets (including trucks and Crews) are
Target Number of Shots If the roll exceeds the Hit Number:
Range (D6) per Phase Hit and must undergo a Momle Check. Roll once to
Target missed • No Effect. check momle for all units in the hex. Apply a +I or +2
If the roll is less than or equal to the Hit Number: modifier if a H+l or H+2 result occurred. Use the
AT RiJle 0-1 1-2 3 Target Breaks Down on a subsequent roll of a " I" following results:
Flamethrower 0-1 1-3 1 for MG fire, a " I" or "2" for ATR fire. Roll for I) Soft Targets and Trucks (plus their Crews) which pass
the Breakdown Type. A Flamethrower hit the Morale Check are Pinned. Units which fail are
MGFire• 0-9 1-4 1 eliminates the Vehicle outright. Eliminated. Cfs are permanently Dismounted on a
second throw of " I".
2) Weapons Units in a hex that are Hit do not check
ANTI-TANK Die Roll Modifiers:
COMBAT momle (an) Crew does) but are destroyed on a
+2 if this is the first shot at a new target. second roll of " I" or "2".
RESULTS +I if this is the second shot at the same target.
TABLE (ATCR'I) 3) Tanks and Armored Cars in a hex that is Hit do not
+0 if this is the third or subsequent shot at the same target. check morale but are destroyed on a second roll of I
To Hit +2 if an ART or AT gun pivoted to fire outside its covered Note: Increase all "H" results by +I if firi ng Shrapnel
Target arc during the Defensive Fire Phase.
Range Number ammo. But a miss is still a miss.
(D10) +2 if a non-Crew unit is firing an AA, AT or ART gun.
+2 if a German tank is firing and the crew has broken AIR Note: Roll for each unit in the hex.
0-1 9 or less morale. BOMBARDMENT Die Roll Modifiers
+2 if an ART gun (only) is firing at a truck or armored car. COMBAT RESULTS
2 8 +I if the target is in a Town hex. Soft Targets and Weapon Units (only) receive the fol-
TABLE lowing die roll modifiers listed below for the terrain
3 7 -I if a Tank Leader is present in the firing tank.
-I if an AT gun (only) is firing at S hexes or less. Total Bombing type they occupy:
4 6 +1-N for the Size Modifier printed on the vehicle. Die Factors -I if units are in a Town hex.
Roll +I if units are in a Trench, Swamp or Woods hex.
5 5 If the roll exceeds the To Hit number: Target Missed- No 4-5 6-10 11+
Effect. +2 if units are in a Strongpoint hex.
6 4 1 p p E
If the roll is less than or equal to the To Hit number: Target P : Soft Targets and Trucks are Pinned. Weapons linits
7 3 Destroyed. 2 . p p are destroyed on a second roll of 1 - 2.
. . E : Ur.it (any type) is Eliminated.
8 2 Note: A natural roll of a " I" is always a hit so long as the 3 p
weapon is within range. Note:CT units may not claimTrench or Strongpoint benefits.
9-10 I 4+ - . . Vehicles may only claim the Town penalty.

Printed in the USA

TABLES Copyright 1994 Clash ofArms Games
 As the stench and
horror of World War I
trench warfare increase,
both sides seek the
breakthrough weapon;
immense barrages, air
power, flamethrowers,
even poison gas. All are
tried and found wanting.
At last the most awesome
machine of all is made
ready - the Landship!
Landships! Tactical
Weapons Innovations
1914-1918 covers the
Great War at its lowest
level. The 420 playing
pieces represent infan-
try platoons and cavalry
squadrons, or a single
tank or gun. Each tum
is around 5 minutes and
a hex on the eight geo-
morphic map sections is
about 100 meters.
Easy to play rules with
over 20 scenarios get you
started right away. Trace
the story of combat dur-
ing the war; from the sim-
ple slaughters of 1914 to
the sophisticated com-
bined arms offensives of
1918.